Lg 26Lh2000 Owner S Manual SAC31539709_eng_REV08
Lg-42Lh3000-Aek-Owner-S-Manual lg-42lh3000-aek-owner-s-manual
Lg-37Lh2000-Owner-S-Manual lg-37lh2000-owner-s-manual
Lg-19Lh2000-Owner-S-Manual lg-19lh2000-owner-s-manual
Lg-26Lg3100-Owner-S-Manual lg-26lg3100-owner-s-manual
Lg-22Lh2000-Owner-S-Manual lg-22lh2000-owner-s-manual
2014-07-06
: Lg Lg-26Lh2000-Owner-S-Manual lg-26lh2000-owner-s-manual lg pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 194
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
ENGLISH Trade Mark of the DVB Digital Video Broadcasting Project (1991 to 1996) ID Number(s): 6337 : 19LU4000 6423 : 19LU4010 6338 : 22LU4000 6424 : 22LU4010 6334 : 19LU5000 6428 : 19LU5010 6425 : 19LU5020 6335 : 22LU5000 6429 : 22LU5010 6426 : 22LU5020 6336 : 26LU5000 6430 : 26LU5010 6427 : 26LU5020 6200: 19LH2000 6437 : 19LH2010 6431 : 19LH2020 6201: 22LH2000 6438 : 22LH2010 6432 : 22LH2020 6202: 26LH2000 6439 : 26LH2010 6433 : 26LH2020 6203: 32LH2000 6440 : 32LH2010 6434 : 32LH2020 6204: 37LH2000 6441 : 37LH2010 6435 : 37LH2020 6205 : 42LH2000 6442 : 42LH2010 6436 : 42LH2020 6206 : 32LH3000 6451 : 32LH3010 6447 : 32LH3020 6443 : 32LH3030 6208: 37LH3000 6452 : 37LH3010 6448 : 37LH3020 6444 : 37LH3030 6209: 42LH3000 6453 : 42LH3010 6449 : 42LH3020 6445 : 42LH3030 6210: 47LH3000 6454 : 47LH3010 6450 : 47LH3020 6446 : 47LH3030 6211: 32LH4000 6467 : 32LH4020 6463 : 32LH4010 6212: 37LH4000 6468 : 37LH4020 6464 : 37LH4010 6213: 42LH4000 6469 : 42LH4020 6465 : 42LH4010 6214: 47LH4000 6470 : 47LH4020 6466 : 47LH4010 6484: 32LH5000 6455 : 32LH5020 6459 : 32LH5010 6485: 37LH5000 6456 : 37LH5020 6460 : 37LH5010 6486: 42LH5000 6457 : 42LH5020 6461 : 42LH5010 6487 : 47LH5000 6458 : 47LH5020 6462 : 47LH5010 6195: 32LH7000 6529 : 32LH7010 6475 : 32LH7020 6471 : 32LH7030 6196: 37LH7000 6479 : 37LH7010 6476 : 37LH7020 6472 : 37LH7030 6197: 42LH7000 6528 : 42LH7010 6477 : 42LH7020 6473 : 42LH7030 6198: 47LH7000 6480 : 47LH7010 6478 : 47LH7020 6474 : 47LH7030 6481 : 32LF2500 6618 : 32LF2510 6482 : 37LF2500 6617 : 37LF2510 6483 : 42LF2500 6616 : 42LF2510 6488 : 32LH4900 6489 : 37LH4900 6490 : 42LH4900 6491 : 47LH4900 6755 : 32LG2100 6756 : 37LG2100 6757 : 42LG2100 6191: 50PS7000 6192: 60PS7000 6193: 50PS8000 6194: 60PS8000 6558 : 42LH9000 6557 : 47LH9000 6831 : 55LH5000 6868 : 32LH3800 6869 : 37LH3800 6870 : 42LH3800 6825 : 19LG3100 6826 : 22LG3100 6827 : 26LG3100 6189 : 42PQ3500 6190 : 50PQ3500 6186 : 42PQ6500 6908 : 50PS6500 6876 : 32LH3040 6877 : 37LH3040 6878 : 42LH3040 6879 : 47LH3040 6880 : 32LG3300 6881 : 37LG3300 6882 : 42LG3300 6897 : 19LH201C 6898 : 22LH201C 6899 : 26LH201C 6900 : 32LH201C 6901 : 37LH201C 6902 : 42LH201C 6904 : 32LH301C 6905 : 37LH301C 6906 : 42LH301C 6907 : 47LH301C 6927 : 32LF5100 6926 : 42LF5100 6925 : 47LF5100 6954 : 32LG2200 LCD TV LED LCD TV PLASMA TV OWNER’S MANUAL LCD TV MODELS 19LU40** 22LU40** 19LU50** 22LU50** 26LU50** 19LH20** 22LH20** 26LH20** 3 2 L H 2 0* * 3 7 L H 2 0* * 4 2 L H 2 0* * 3 2 L H 3* * * 3 7 L H 3* * * 4 2 L H 3* * * 4 7 L H 3* * * 3 2 L H 4 0* * 3 7 L H 4 0* * 4 2 L H 4 0* * 4 7 L H 4 0* * 3 2 L H 5 0* * 3 7 L H 5 0* * 4 2 L H 5 0* * 4 7 L H 5 0* * 5 5 L H 5 0* * 3 2 L H 7 0* * 3 7 L H 7 0* * 4 2 L H 7 0* * 4 7 L H 7 0* * 3 2 L F 2 5* * 3 7 L F 2 5* * 4 2 L F 2 5* * 3 2 L H 4 9* * 3 7 L H 4 9* * 4 2 L H 4 9* * 4 7 L H 4 9* * 3 2 L G 2* * * 3 7 L G 2* * * 4 2 L G 2* * * 1 9 L G 3 1* * 2 2 L G 3 1* * 2 6 L G 3 1* * 32LG33** 37LG33** 42LG33** 32LF51** 42LF51** 47LF51** 1 9 L D 3* * 2 2 L D 3* * 2 6 L D 3* * 3 2 L D 3* * LED LCD TV MODELS PLASMA TV MODELS 4 2 L H 9 0* * 4 7 L H 9 0* * 5 0 P S 7 0* * 6 0 P S 7 0* * 5 0 P S 8 0* * 6 0 P S 8 0* * 4 2 P Q 3 5* * 5 0 P Q 3 5* * 4 2 P Q 6 5* * 5 0 P S 6 5* * Please read this manual carefully before operating your TV. Retain it for future reference. Record the model number and serial number of the TV. Refer to the label on the back cover and quote this information. To your dealer when requiring any service. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. Use screws 12 mm (+ 0.5/- 0.5) long on the SET assembly side. (Only 42/47LH70**) Set assembly side (with guide spacer) Set assembly side (without guide spacer) 12 mm 12 mm Guide spacer Wall Mounting Bracket(Separate purchase) RW120 RW230 (19/22LU50** /19/22LU40** /19/22LH20** /19/22LD3** /19/22LG31**) (26LG31**/26LU50** /32LF25**/32LG2*** /32LG33** /26/32LH20** /26/32LD3**/ 32LH3***/32LH40**/ 32LH49**/32LH50** /32LH70**/32LF51**) AW-47LG30M (32/37/42LF25** /32/37/42LG2*** /32/37/42LG33** /32/37/42LH20** /32LD3** /32/37/42/47LH3*** /32/37/42/47LH40** /32/37/42/47LH49** /32/37/42/47LH50** /32/37/42/47LH70** /42/47LH90** /32/42/47LF51**) AW-50PG60MS AW-60PG60MS (50PS70**/50PS80** /42/50PQ35** /42PQ65**/50PS65**) (60PS70**/60PS80**) AW-55LH40M (55LH50**) ACCESSORIES Ensure that the following accessories are included with your TV. If an accessory is missing, please contact the dealer where you purchased the TV. ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. AV V PO W ER MO DE PO W ER ON /O FF ENER GY TV /RAD SAVIN G ACCESSORIES LIS T M UT E MAR K Q.V IEW FA V or or ME NU Q.M EN U RETU RN IN FO i / EX IT GU ID E MA R FA K V RA TIO This item is not included for all models. AVV MO DE * Lightly wipe any stains or fingerprints on the surface of the TV with the polishing cloth. Remote Control Owner’s Manual Ferrite Core (This item is not included for all models.) Polishing Cloth Do not use excessive force. Polishing cloth for This may cause scratching or use on the screen. discolouration. Power Cord Batteries PLASMA TV models x2 or x4 Cable Holder Protection cover (Refer to p.33) (Refer to p.34) Bolts for stand assembly (Only 50PS70**/50PS80**/ 42/50PQ35**/42PQ65**/50PS65**) (Refer to p.26) Cable management clip (Only 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) (Refer to p.33) LCD TV models / LED LCD TV models Cable management clip (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) (Refer to p.33) Stand rear cover (Only 37/42/47LH70**) (Refer to p.31) Cable Holder (Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**) (Refer to p.32) Cable management clip (Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**) (Refer to p.32) 1-screw for stand fixing (Only 26LG31**, 26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LH3***, 32/37/42LH40**, 32/37/42LH49**, 32/37/42LH50**, 32/37LH70**, 42LH90**, 32/42LF51**) (Refer to p.30) Bolts for stand assembly (Refer to p. 25 to 28) x4 (Only 26LG31**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 42/47LH90**, 32/42LF51**) x5 (Only 19/22LU40**) x4 x2 x3 x8 x7 (Only 26LG31**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 32/42LF51**) (Only (Only 19/22LU50**) 26LU50**) or M4x20 M4x20 x8 M4x16 x3 M4x20 (Only 32LH70**) (Only 37LH70**) (Only 47LH70**) x4 M4x16 (Only 42LH70**) or Stand Rear Body Protective Bracket Cap Protection Cover and Bolt for Power Cord (Only 19/22LU40**) (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**) (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) (Refer to p.34) (Refer to p.28) (Refer to p.33) USB extension cable (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) Make sure to use the provided USB extension cable, Which is specially designed for a slim fit. 1 CONTENTS ACCESSORIES ............................................ 1 PREPARATION CONTENTS Front Panel Controls..................................................... 4 Back Panel Information .............................................. 16 Stand Installation ........................................................ 25 Detaching stand .......................................................29 Attaching the TV to a desk .....................................30 Desktop Pedestal Installation............................... 30 Positioning your display ........................................30 Kensington Security System .................................30 Careful installation advice ..................................... 31 Swivel Stand ..................................................................31 To use the stand rear cover ..................................................31 Back Cover for Wire Arrangement.......................... 32 Not Using the desk-type stand ................................34 Wall Mount: Horizontal Installation........................ 35 Antenna Connection .................................................. 36 TO USE A BLUETOOTH HD Receiver Setup...................................................... 37 DVD Setup .................................................................... 39 VCR Setup..................................................................... 42 Insertion of CI Module .............................................. 44 Digital Audio Out Setup ........................................... 45 Headphone Setup....................................................... 45 Other A/V Source Setup .......................................... 46 Usb Setup...................................................................... 47 PC Setup........................................................................ 48 - Screen Setup for PC Mode................................52 Precautions when using the Bluetooth ................. 88 Setting the Bluetooth ................................................ 89 Set TV PIN .....................................................................90 Bluetooth headset - Connecting a new Bluetooth headset..............91 - Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered.................................................................. 91 - Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use....92 - When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset....................................................92 Managing Registered Bluetooth device ................ 93 My Bluetooth Information. ........................................94 Receiving Photos from external Bluetooth device .........95 Listening to the Musics from external Bluetooth device......95 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL TO USE A USB DEVICE Remote Control Key Functions ............................... 56 Turning on the TV....................................................... 62 Programme Selection ................................................ 62 Volume Adjustment ................................................... 62 Quick Menu ................................................................. 63 On-Screen Menus Selection and Adjustment..... 64 Auto Programme Tuning............................................ 65 Manual Programme Tuning (In Digital Mode)..... 68 When connecting a USB device.............................. 96 Photo List ...................................................................... 97 Music List......................................................................101 Movie List .....................................................................104 DivX Registration Code............................................108 Deactivation.................................................................109 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 2 Manual Programme Tuning (In Analogue Mode)... 70 Programme Edit ........................................................... 72 Booster(In Digital Mode) ...........................................74 Software Update.......................................................... 75 Diagnostics.................................................................... 76 CI Information.............................................................. 77 Selecting the Programme List .................................. 78 Favourite Programme Setup...................................... 79 Input List ....................................................................... 80 Data Service...............................................................81 Input Label .................................................................... 81 Simple Manual.............................................................. 82 ................................................................. 83 AV Mode........................................................................ 86 Initializing (Reset to original factory settings) .....87 EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE) (IN DIGITAL MODE) PICTURE CONTROL Picture Size (Aspect Ratio) Control ..................... 113 Picture Wizard ..............................................................115 Energy Saving ...............................................................116 Preset Picture Settings - Picture Mode-Preset .......................................... 117 Manual Picture Adjustment - Picture Mode-User option................................ 118 Picture Improvement Technology.......................... 119 Expert Picture Control............................................. 120 Picture Reset............................................................... 123 LED Local dimming ..................................................123 Power Indicator............................................................124 Image Sticking Minimization (ISM) Method...... 125 Demo Mode................................................................ 126 Mode Setting ...............................................................127 TIME SETTING CONTENTS Switch on/off EPG..................................................... 110 Select a Programme................................................... 110 Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode...... 110 Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode.................111 Button Function in Date Change Mode............... 111 Button Function in Extended Description Box ....... 112 Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode........ 112 Button Function in Schedule List Mode .............. 112 I/II - Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) 137 - NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) ... 138 - Speaker Sound Output Selection.................. 138 On-Screen Menu Language/Country Selection.... 139 Language Selection (In Digital Mode only)....... 140 Clock Setup................................................................. 141 Auto On/ Off Time Setting .................................... 142 Sleep Timer Setting .................................................. 143 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS Set Password & Lock System................................. 144 Block Programme....................................................... 145 Parental Control (In Digital Mode only)............. 146 External Input Blocking.............................................147 Key Lock ...................................................................... 148 TELETEXT Switch on/off ............................................................. 149 SIMPLE Text ................................................................ 149 TOP Text...................................................................... 149 FASTEXT...................................................................... 150 Special Teletext Functions ...................................... 150 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL DIGITAL TELETEXT Auto Volume Leveler................................................. 128 Clear Voice II................................................................129 Preset Sound Settings - Sound Mode .............. 130 Sound Setting Adjustment -User Mode............131 SRS TruSurround XT............................................. 131 Balance .................................................................... 132 TV Speakers On/ Off Setup ................................132 DTV Audio setting (In Digital Mode only) . .133 Selecting Digital Audio Out.................................134 Audio Reset..............................................................135 Audio Description (In Digital Mode only)........136 Teletext within Digital Service ................................ 151 Teletext in Digital Service........................................ 151 APPENDIX Troubleshooting......................................................... 152 Maintenance .............................................................. 154 Product Specifications ............................................. 155 IR Codes ...................................................................... 169 External Control Device Setup .............................. 170 3 PREPARATION FRONT PANEL CONTROLS ! NOTE G PREPARATION ■ TV can be placed in standby mode in order to reduce the power consumption. And TV should be switched off using the power switch on the TV if it will not be watched for some time, as this will reduce energy consumption. The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the level of brightness of the picture is reduced, and this will reduce the overall running cost. Image shown may differ from your TV. Plasma TV Models CAUTION When the TV cannot be turned on with the remote control, press the main power button on the TV. (When the power is turned off with the main power button on the TV, it will not be turned on with the remote control). G Do not step on the glass stand or subject it to any impact. It may break, causing possible injury from fragments of glass, or the TV may fall. G Do not drag the TV. The floor or the product may be damaged. G 50/60PS70** PROGRAMME VOLUME OK MENU Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • The LED is off while the TV remains on. 4 INPUT POWER 50/60PS80** PREPARATION PROGRAMME VOLUME OK MENU Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. Remote Control Sensor INPUT POWER Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • The LED is off while the TV remains on. 5 PREPARATION 42/50PQ35** PREPARATION Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. MENU INPUT MENU INPUT INPUT INPUT MENU INPUT 6 OK MENU OK P OK POWER P MENU OK VOLUME OK P P POWER PROGRAMME POWER POWER P PROGRAMME PREPARATION T 42PQ65**, 50PS65** P VOLUME OK OK Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • The LED is off while the TV remains on. MENU OK P MENU MENU INPUT INPUT POWER POWER 7 PREPARATION LED LCD TV Models : 42/47LH90** PREPARATION P PROGRAMME VOLUME OK OK MENU MENU INPUT POWER SPEAKER Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • Illuminates white when the TV is switched on. Note: You can turn the P o w e r I n d i c a t o r on or off in the OPTION menu. 8 INPUT Main Power Switch LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40** VOLUME OK OK MENU INPUT Power/Standby Indicator • illuminates red in standby mode. • The LED is off while the TV remains on. PREPARATION P PROGRAMME MENU INPUT POWER Remote Control Sensor Main Power Switch 9 PREPARATION LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70** P P PREPARATION P VOLUME Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions Remote Control Sensor OK OK MENU MENU Moving LED INPUT INPUT POWER(Touch Sensor) Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • Illuminates whitish when the TV is switched on. Note: You can adjust P o w e r I n d i c a t o r in the OPTION menu. Main Power Switch 10 PROGRAMME LCD TV Models : 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3*** (Only 19/22/26LH20**, 19/22/26LD3**) POWER INPUT MENU OK OK PROGRAMME P (Only 32/37/42LH20**, 32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***) P PREPARATION INPUT MENU VOLUME PROGRAMME VOLUME OK Remote Control Sensor OK MENU MENU INPUT INPUT POWER Power/Standby Indicator Illuminates red in standby mode. Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. Main Power Switch 11 PREPARATION LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50** PREPARATION PROGRAMME P VOLUME OK OK MENU MENU INPUT INPUT Remote Control Sensor Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. Power/Standby Indicator • Illuminates red in standby mode. • Illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. 12 Main Power Switch POWER LCD TV Models : 19/22/26LU50** (Only 19/22LU50**) POWER INPUT MENU OK VOLUME PROGRAMME PREPARATION INPUT MENU OK P P (Only 26LU50**) P PROGRAMME P VOLUME OK OK P MENU MENU INPUT INPUT POWER Remote Control Sensor Main Power Switch Power/Standby Indicator Illuminates red in standby mode. Illuminates white when the TV is switched on. 13 PREPARATION LCD TV Models : 19/22LG31** PREPARATION INPUT MENU VOLUME OK INPUT MENU OK - PROGRAMME + - P + POWER Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator • illuminates red in standby mode. • illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. 14 LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**, 32/42/47LF51** PROGRAMME PREPARATION P + VOLUME - OK OK MENU MENU POWER Remote Control Sensor Power/Standby Indicator • illuminates red in standby mode. • illuminates blue when the TV is switched on. INPUT INPUT Intelligent Sensor Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. (32/42/47LF51** only) 15 PREPARATION BACK PANEL INFORMATION A Image shown may differ from your TV. Plasma TV Models : 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80** PREPARATION 10 1 11 2 3 4 5 2 12 6 9 8 1 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 2 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI(VIDEO)signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. 8 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. 9 3 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 10 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 11 USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack. 4 5 6 16 7 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. 12 S-Video Input Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device. Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. HDMI VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R S-VIDEO Plasma TV Models : 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65** R AV IN 3 10 4 HDMI IN 3 3 2 1 VARIABLE AUDIO OUT HDMI/DVI IN 5 1 6 7 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page. (G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 4 5 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R S-VIDEO HDMI IN Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. 5 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. 6 RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. 8 USB IN SERVICE ONLY 11 2 PREPARATION 1 12 AV IN 3 9 7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 9 Antenna Input Connect RF antenna to this jack. 10 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 11 USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack. 12 S-Video Input Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device. Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. 17 HDMI IN 2 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R PREPARATION LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31** (Only 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) AV IN(Only 3 32/37/42LF25**) (Only 19/22LG31**) H/P PREPARATION 10 13 3 1 10 5 12 4 HDMI IN 2 2 10 (RGB) USB IN SERVICE ONLY HDMI IN 2 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 5 H/P 11 12 H/P AV IN 3 HDMI / DVI IN 1 12 ANTENNA IN 5 7 8 9 1 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 4 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. 5 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. 6 18 6 H/P RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. 10 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 11 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. 12 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 13 SERVICE ONLY PORT VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R ON LCD TV Models : 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50** H/P OFF AV IN 3 (Only 26LU50**) 1 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R HDMI IN 3 H/P ON OFF ON 1 H/P H/P OFF 10 AV IN 3 (Only 19/22LU40**) (Only 19/22/26LU50**) 2 12 4 3 ON ON 2 OFFOFF 1(DVI) HDMI IN 3 HDMI IN 3 (RGB) USB IN SERVICE ONLY 5 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 11 13 AVAV IN IN 3 3 HDMI / DVI IN ANTENNA IN 6 7 8 1 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 4 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. 5 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. 6 7 10 H/PH/P COMPONENT IN 5 PREPARATION 11 H/P 9 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 10 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 11 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 12 SERVICE ONLY PORT 13 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. RGB Input Connect the output from a PC. RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 19 PREPARATION LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70** PREPARATION 2 12 3 4 5 6 1 7 (RGB) 8 1 20 9 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 2 USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack. 3 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI(VIDEO)signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. 4 S-Video Input Connect S-Video out from an S-VIDEO device. Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. 5 RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 6 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 10 11 7 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 9 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 10 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. 11 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 12 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) HDMI IN 3 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R HDMI IN 3 USB IN VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R SERVICE ONLY VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R AV IN 3 LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/42/47LF51** H/P32/42/47LF51**) (Only (Only 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, (Only 32/37/42/47LH40**) 32/37/42/47LH49**) 10 AV IN 3 AV IN 3 H/P (Only 32/42/47LF51**) 11 11 11 1 (Only 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH49**) PREPARATION H/P 1 10 14 HDMI / DVI IN AV IN 3 1(DVI) H/P 5 6 7 8 1 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 4 5 6 HDMI IN 3 HDMI IN 3 12 AV IN 3 AV IN 3 ANTENNA IN VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 2 HDMI IN 4 HDMI / DVI IN 12 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 5 5 5 L/MONO MONO AUDIO R VIDEO L/ (RGB) HDMI IN 3 1(DVI) L/MONO MONO AUDIO R VIDEO L/ 2 HDMI IN 3 4 3 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 2 3 AV IN 3 13 13 H/P 12 AV IN 3 13 H/P H/P H/P 9 7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 10 USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack. 11 HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 12 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. 13 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 14 SERVICE ONLY PORT Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. 5 21 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R HDMI IN 4 PREPARATION LED LCD TV Models : 42/47LH90** 10 AV IN 3 PREPARATION H/P 11 1 (RGB) HDMI / DVI IN 3 2 HDMI IN 4 4 3 5 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 2 12 AV IN 3 13 1(DVI) ANTENNA IN 5 7 8 9 1 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 10 USB Input Connect USB storage device to this jack. 11 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 12 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. 13 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 4 5 6 22 6 H/P Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R HDMI IN 2 H/P LCD TV Models : 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3*** (Only 32/37/42/47LH3***) (Only 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**) AV IN 3 (Only 32/37/42/47LH3***) USB IN SERVICE ONLY 10 2 10 1 HDMI / DVI IN 1 PREPARATION HDMI H/P 5 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 5 (RGB) USB IN SERVICE ONLY 11 AV IN 3 HDMI / DVI IN 1 HDMI IN 2 4 3 HDMI IN 3 2 5 VIDEO L/MONO AUDIO R 13 11 AV IN 3 12 ANTENNA IN 5 6 7 8 H/P 12 H/P 9 1 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. 7 RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 4 5 6 10 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 11 Audio/Video Input Connect audio/video output from an external device to these jacks. 12 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 13 SERVICE ONLY PORT RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. 23 H/P PREPARATION LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3** PREPARATION 11 1 2 12 3 4 10 COMPONENT IN USB IN SERVICE ONLY H/P (RGB) RGB IN (PC) HDMI / DVI IN ANTENNA IN 5 7 8 9 Power Cord Socket This TV operates on an AC power. The voltage is indicated on the Specifications page.(G p.155 to 167) Never attempt to operate the TV on DC power. RS-232C IN (CONTROL & SERVICE) PORT Connect to the RS-232C port on a PC. This port is used for Service or Hotel mode. 2 RGB/DVI Audio Input Connect the audio from a PC or DTV. 8 Component Input Connect a component video/audio device to these jacks. 3 OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT Connect digital audio to various types of equipment. Connect to a Digital Audio Component. Use an Optical audio cable. 9 Antenna Input Connect antenna or cable to this jack. 10 Headphone Socket Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 11 PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) Card Slot Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A C A R D S L O T . (This feature is not available in all countries.) 12 SERVICE ONLY PORT 4 5 6 24 6 7 1 Euro Scart Socket (AV1/AV2) Connect scart socket input or output from an external device to these jacks. HDMI/DVI IN Input Connect an HDMI signal to HDMI IN. Or DVI (VIDEO) signal to HDMI/DVI port with DVI to HDMI cable. RGB IN Input Connect the output from a PC. STAND INSTALLATION ■ Image shown may differ from your TV When assembling the desk type stand, check whether the bolt is fully tightened. (If not tightened fully, the product can tilt forward after the product installation.) If you tighten the bolt with excessive force, the bolt can deviate from abrasion of the tightening part of the bolt. 1 2 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. Assemble the parts of the S t a n d B o d y with the S t a n d B a s e of the TV. 32LH70** Only 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47LH50**, 42/47LH90** 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 2 Assemble the TV as shown. 3 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV. PREPARATION Only 32/37/42/47LH70** 47LH70** 37LH70** Stand Body M4x20 M4x16 M4x20 Stand Base 42LH70** M4x20 Stand Body Stand Base 3 Assemble the TV as shown. 4 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV. 32/37LH70** M4x20 42/47LH70** M4x16 25 PREPARATION Only 50PS70**/50PS80**/ 42/50PQ35**/42PQ65**/50PS65** 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 2 Assemble the TV as shown. 2 Assemble the TV as shown. 3 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV. PREPARATION Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3** Cover Base When assembling the stand, make sure to distinguish and assemble the front and rear side of the stand correctly. Front 26 Only 19/22LG31** 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 2 Fix the 2 or 3 bolts securely using the holes. 2 Assemble the parts of the S t a n d B o d y with C o v e r B a s e of the TV. Insert the S t a n d B o d y into a C o v e r B a s e until clicking sound. PREPARATION Only 19/22/26LU50** Stand Body (Only 26LU50**) Cover Base 3 Assemble the TV as shown. 27 PREPARATION Only 32/37/42LF25**, Only 19/22LU40** 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, place the TV screen side down on a cush1 Carefully 26LG31**, 32/42LF51** ioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. PREPARATION 2 2 Fix the 3 bolts securely using the holes in the C o v e r B a s e. Assemble the parts of the S t a n d B o d y with the C o v e r B a s e of the TV. Cover Base Stand Body 3 Assemble the parts of the S t a n d R e a r B o d y with the TV. Cover Base 3 Assemble the TV as shown. Stand Rear Body 4 4 Assemble the parts of the C a p with the S t a n d R e a r B o d y of the TV. Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV. Cap Stand Rear Body 28 DETACHING STAND ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. Only 19/22LU40** Only 19/22/26LU50** Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 2 Detach the C a p from TV. Press in the direction of the arrow to detach the cap. 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 2 Loose the bolts and then detach the stand from TV. PREPARATION 1 Cap 3 Loose the bolts and then detach the S t a n d R e a r B o d y from TV. (Only 26LU50**) 3 Cover Base Stand Rear Body 4 Loose the bolts from TV. Detach the C o v e r B a s e from T V. (Only 26LU50**) Loose the bolts and then detach the C o v e r B a s e from TV. 4 Detach the S t a n d B o d y from T V. Stand Body Cover Base 5 Loose the bolts and then detach the S t a n d B o d y from TV. Stand Body 29 PREPARATION ATTACHING THE TV TO A DESK (Only 26LG31**, 26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LH3***, 32/37/42LH40**, 32/37/42LH49**, 32/37/42LH50**, 32/37LH70**, 42LH90**, 32/42LF51**) POSITIONING YOUR DISPLAY (Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**) ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. Adjust the position of the panel in various ways for maximum comfort. • Tilt range ■ PREPARATION ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. The TV must be attached to desk so it cannot be pulled in a forward/backward direction, potentially causing injury or damaging the product. Use only an attached screw. 12 0 0 3 ! NOTE G 1-Screw (provided as parts of the product) Stand The following model is a fixed stand type model without the Tilt and Swivel features so excessive pressure may damage the set. -19/22/26LU50**, 19/22LU40** KENSINGTON SECURITY SYSTEM This feature is not available for all models. ■ ■ Desk ! WARNING G To prevent TV from falling over, the TV should be securely attached to the floor/wall per installation instructions. Tipping, shaking, or rocking the machine may cause injury. DESKTOP PEDESTALINSTALLATION For adequate ventilation allow a clearance of 10cm all around the TV. 10 cm 10 cm 30 10 cm 10 cm Image shown may differ from your TV. The TV is equipped with a Kensington Security System connector on the back panel. Connect the Kensington Security System cable as shown below. For the detailed installation and use of the Kensington Security System, refer to the user’s guide provided with the Kensington Security System. For further information, contact http://www.kensington.com, the internet homepage of the Kensington company. Kensington sells security systems for expensive electronic equipment such as notebook PCs and LCD projectors. NOTE - The Kensington Security System is an optional accessory. NOTES a. If the TV feels cold to the touch, there may be a small “flicker” when it is turned on. This is normal, there is nothing wrong with TV. b. Some minute dot defects may be visible on the screen, appearing as tiny red, green, or blue spots. However, they have no adverse effect on the monitor's performance. c. Avoid touching the LCD screen or holding your finger(s) against it for long periods of time. Doing so may produce some temporary distortion effects on the screen. CAREFUL INSTALLATION ADVICE (Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**,19/22LG31**) ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. After installing the TV, you can adjust the TV set manually to the left or right direction by 20 degrees to suit your viewing position. PREPARATION You should purchase necessary components to fix the TV safety and secure to the wall on the market. A Position the TV close to the wall to avoid the possibility of it falling when pushed. A The instructions shown below are a safer way to set up the TV, by fixing it to the wall, avoiding the possibility of it falling forwards if pulled. This will prevent the TV from falling forward and causing injury. This will also prevent the TV from damage. Ensure that children do not climb or hang from the TV. A SWIVEL STAND 1 1 2 2 TO USE THE STAND REAR COVER (Only 37/42/47LH70**) 1 Use the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts to fix the product to the wall as shown in the picture. (If your TV has bolts in the eyebolts, loosen then bolts.) * Insert the eye-bolts or TV brackets/bolts and tighten them securely in the upper holes. 2 Secure the wall brackets with the bolts on the wall. Match the height of the bracket that is mounted on the wall. ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. Install the S t a n d R e a r C o v e r as shown. Stand Rear Cover 3 Grip the knob in your fingers and pull it. 3 Use a sturdy rope to tie the product for alignment. It is safer to tie the rope so it becomes horizontal between the wall and the product. ! NOTE G G G When moving the TV undo the cords first. Use a platform or cabinet strong and large enough to support the size and weight of the TV. To use the TV safely make sure that the height of the bracket on the wall and on the TV is the same. 31 PREPARATION BACK COVER FOR WIRE ARRANGEMENT ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31** PREPARATION 1 2 Connect the cables as necessary. To connect additional equipment, see the External Equipment Setup section. LCD TV Models / LED LCD TV Models : 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 42/47LH90**, 32/42/47LF51** 1 Connect the cables as necessary. To connect additional equipment, see the External Equipment Setup section. 2 Open the Cable Management Clip as shown. Install the Cable Management Clip as shown. Cable Management Clip 3 Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown. Cable Management Clip 3 Fit the Cable Management Clip as shown. How to remove the cable management clip (LCD TV Models : 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, LCD TV Models : 19/22LG31**) Hold the Cable Management Clip with both hands and pull it backward. ! NOTE not use the Cable Management Clip to lift the TV. - If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the TV may be damaged. G Do 32 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50** After Connecting the cables as necessary, install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables. LCD TV Models : 32/37/42/47LH70** Align the hole with the tab on the Cable Management Clip. Turn the Cable Management Clip as shown. Note : that excessive force might cause damage to the product when using Cable Management clip. 1 Plasma TV Models : 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65** After Connecting the cables as necessary, install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables. Plasma TV Models : 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80** 1 PREPARATION Cable Holder After Connecting the cables as necessary, install Cable Holder as shown and bundle the cables. To connect additional equipment, see the E x t e r n a l E q u i p m e n t S e t u p section. Cable Management Clip Connect the cables as necessary. To connect additional equipment, see the E x t e r n a l E q u i p m e n t S e t u p section. 2 Cable Holder 2 Install the Cable Management Clip as shown. How to secure the power cable (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) 1 Secure the power cable with the Protective Bracket and the bolt as shown. It will help prevent the power cable from being removed by accident. Bolt Cable Management Clip How to remove the cable management clip (Only 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) Hold the Cable Management Clip with both hands and pull it upward. Protective Bracket ! NOTE G Do not use the Cable Management Clip to lift the TV. - If the TV is dropped, you may be injured or the TV may be damaged. 33 PREPARATION NOT USING THE DESK-TYPE STAND (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**) ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. When installing the wall-mounted unit, use the protection cover. Only 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31** Plasma TV models PREPARATION 1 Carefully place the TV screen side down on a cushioned surface to protect the screen from damage. 2 Loose the bolts from TV. 3 Detach the stand from TV. 4 Insert the P r o t e c t i o n C o v e r into the TV. Protection Cover Insert the P r o t e c t i o n C o v e r into the TV until clicking sound. LCD TV models / LED LCD TV Models Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90** Protection Cover After removing the protection paper from the protection cover, adhere it to the TV as shown. Only 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50** Insert the P r o t e c t i o n C o v e r into the TV until Protection Cover clicking sound. Only 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**, 32/42/47LF51** 34 Insert the P r o t e c t i o n C o v e r into the TV until clicking sound. Protection Cover Protection Cover 5 Fix the 4 bolts securely using the holes in the back of the TV. A The TV can be installed in various ways such as on a wall, or on a desktop etc. A The TV is designed to be mounted horizontally. A B EARTHING Power Supply Circuit breaker WALL MOUNT: HORIZONTAL INSTALLATION We recommend the use of a LG Brand wall mounting bracket when mounting the TV to a wall. A We recommend that you purchase a wall mounting bracket which supports VESA standard. A LG recommends that wall mounting be performed by a qualified professional installer. A First you connect the USB extension cable to the USB IN terminal, and then hang it on the wall. (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) A ! NOTE Should Install wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor. G Should use a special wall mount, if you want to install it to ceiling or slanted wall. G The surface that wall mount is to be mounted on should be of sufficient strength to support the weight of TV set; e.g. concrete, natural rock, brick and hollow block. G Installing screw type and length depends on the wall mount used. Further information, refer to the instructions included with the mount. G LG is not liable for any accidents or damage to property or TV due to incorrect installation: - Where a non-compliant VESA wall mount is used. - Incorrect fastening of screws to surface which may cause TV to fall and cause personal injury. - Not following the recommended Installation method. G 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm 10 cm Model 19/22LU40** 19/22LU50** 26LU50** 19/22LG31** 26LG31** 32LF25** 37/42LF25** 32LG2*** 37/42LG2*** 32LG33** 37/42LG33** 19/22LH20** 26/32LH20** 37/42LH20** 19/22LD3** 26/32LD3** 32LH3*** 37/42/47LH3*** 32LH40** 37/42/47LH40** 32LH49** 37/42/47LH49** 32LH50** 37/42/47LH50** 55LH50** 32LH70** 37/42/47LH70** 42/47LH90** 32LF51** 42/47LF51** 50PS70** 60PS70** 50PS80** 60PS80** 42/50PQ35** 42PQ65** 50PS65** VESA Standard (A * B) Screw Quantity 4 100 * 100 M4 4 100 * 100 M4 4 200 * 100 M4 4 100 * 100 M4 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 100 * 100 M4 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 100 * 100 M4 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 400 * 400 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 200 M6 4 200 * 100 M4 4 200 * 200 M6 4 400 * 400 M6 4 600 * 400 M8 4 400 * 400 M6 4 600 * 400 M8 4 400 * 400 M6 4 400 * 400 M6 4 400 * 400 M6 PREPARATION Ensure that you connect the earth wire to prevent possible electric shock. If grounding methods are not possible, have a qualified electrician install a separate circuit breaker. Do not try to earth the TV by connecting it to telephone wires, lightening rods or gas pipes. 35 PREPARATION ■ To prevent damage do not connect to the mains outlet until all connections are made between the devices. ANTENNA CONNECTION ■ ■ For optimum picture quality, adjust antenna direction. An antenna cable and converter are not supplied. PREPARATION Wall Antenna Socket Outdoor Antenna (VHF, UHF) Multi-family Dwellings/Apartments (Connect to wall antenna socket) RF Coaxial Wire (75 Ω) Single-family Dwellings /Houses (Connect to wall jack for outdoor antenna) UHF Antenna Signal Amplifier VHF ■ ■ In poor signal areas, to achieve better picture quality it may be necessary to install a signal amplifier to the antenna as shown above. If signal needs to be split for two TVs, use an antenna signal splitter for connection. Use of ferrite core (This feature is not available for all models) Ferrite core can be used to reduce the electromagnetic wave when connecting the power cord. The closer the location of the ferrite core to the power plug, the better it is. Install the power plug closely. 36 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP To avoid damaging any equipment, never plug in any power cord until you have finished connecting all equipment. This section on EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP mainly uses diagrams for the 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80** models. ■ ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. ■ HD RECEIVER SETUP ■ This TV can receive Digital RF/Cable signals without an external digital set-top box. However, if you do receive Digital signals from a digital set-top box or other digital external device, refer to the diagram as shown below. Connecting with a Component cable Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the digital set top box to the C O M P O N E N T I N V I D E O jacks on the TV. 2 Connect the audio output of the digital set-top box to the C O M P O N E N T I N A U D I O jacks on the TV. 3 Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital set-top box.) 4 Select C o m p o n e n t input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 1 2 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 G HDMI Audio Supported format : Dolby Digital, PCM DTS Audio format is not supported. Signal Component 480i/576i O X 480p/576p O O 720p/1080i O O 1080p HDMI O O (50 Hz / 60 Hz only) (24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz) 37 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Connecting a set-top box with an HDMI cable EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 Connect the digital set-top box to H D M I / D V I I N 1, H D M I I N 2 (Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**),, H D M I I N 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) or H D M I I N 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) jack on the TV. 2 Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital set-top box.) 3 Select H D M I 1, H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), H D M I 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) or H D M I 4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 1 ! NOTE G Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher. If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3. Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable 1 Connect the digital set-top box to H D M I / D V I I N 1 jack on the TV. 2 Connect the audio output of the digital set-top box to the A U D I O I N ( R G B / D V I ) jack on the TV. 3 Turn on the digital set-top box. (Refer to the owner’s manual for the digital set-top box.) 4 38 Select H D M I 1 input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 1 2 DVD SETUP Connecting with a Component cable 1 Connect the video outputs (Y, PB, PR) of the DVD to the C O M P O N E N T I N V I D E O jacks on the TV. 1 Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the C O M P O N E N T I N A U D I O jacks on the TV. 3 Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD. 2 4 Select C o m p o n e n t input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 5 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 2 Component Input ports To achieve better picture quality, connect a DVD player to the component input ports as shown below. Component ports on the TV Video output ports on DVD player Y PB PR Y PB PR Y B-Y R-Y Y Cb Cr Y Pb Pr 39 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Connecting with a Euro Scart cable EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 Connect the Euro scart socket of the DVD to the A V 1 Euro scart socket on the TV. 2 Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD. 3 Select A V 1 input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. If connected to A V 2 Euro scart socket, select A V 2 input source. 4 1 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions. Scart Video O AV1 AV2 O Audio O O RGB O X (R) AUDIO (L) AUDIO/ VIDEO Output Input Video, Audio Analogue only Analogue, DTV, AV1/2/3 output is available. AV2 Output Type Current input mode Digital TV AV1 (TV Out) X O O Analogue TV, AV1/3 O O O Component/RGB O X HDMI (The input mode is converted to DTV.) X X AV2 O O AV2 (Monitor Out) (When DTV scheduled recording is in progress using recording equipment.) G TV Out : Outputs analogue TV signals. Monitor Out: Outputs the current screen image. O ! NOTE G Any Euro scart cable used must be signal shielded. Connecting with a S-Video cable (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) 1 Connect the S-VIDEO output of the DVD to the S V I D E O input on the TV. 2 Connect the audio outputs of the DVD to the A U D I O input jacks on the TV. 3 Turn on the DVD player, insert a DVD. 4 Select A V 3 input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 5 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions. VIDEO S-VIDEO R OUTPUT SWITCH 1 40 L ANT IN ANT OUT 2 Connecting the HDMI cable Connect the HDMI output of the DVD to the H D M I / D V I I N 1 , H D M I I N 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**),, H D M I I N 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) or H D M I I N 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) jack on the TV. 2 Select H D M I 1, H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), H D M I 3(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) or H D M I 4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 3 Refer to the DVD player's manual for operating instructions. 1 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 ! NOTE G The TV can receive video and audio signals simultaneously when using an HDMI cable. G If the DVD does not support Auto HDMI, you must set the output resolution appropriately. G Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher. If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3. 41 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP VCR SETUP ■ To avoid picture noise (interference), allow adequate distance between the VCR and TV. Connecting with a RF Cable EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP ANT OUT S-VIDEO ANT IN OUTPUT SWITCH VIDEO L R 1 2 Wall Jack Antenna 42 1 Connect the A N T O U T socket of the VCR to the A N T E N N A I N socket on the TV. 2 Connect the antenna cable to the A N T I N socket of the VCR. 3 Press the P L A Y button on the VCR and match the appropriate channel between the TV and VCR for viewing. Connecting with a Euro Scart cable Connect the Euro scart socket of the VCR to the A V 1 Euro scart socket on the TV. 2 Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.) 3 Select A V 1 input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 1 If connected to A V 2 Euro scart socket, select A V 2 input source. 4 Output Input Scart Video O AV1 AV2 O Audio O O RGB O X Video, Audio Analogue only (R) AUDIO (L) AUDIO/ VIDEO Analogue, DTV, AV1/2/3 output is available. AV2 Output Type Current input mode Digital TV AV1 (TV Out) X O O Analogue TV, AV1/3 O O O Component/RGB O X HDMI (The input mode is converted to DTV.) X X AV2 O O AV2 (Monitor Out) (When DTV scheduled recording is in progress using recording equipment.) G TV Out : Outputs analogue TV signals. Monitor Out: Outputs the current screen image. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 O ! NOTE Any Euro Scart cable used must be signal shielded. G Connecting with a RCA cable (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**, 32/37/42LF25**) 1 V I D E O jacks between TV and Connect the A U D I O/V VCR. Match the jack colours (Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red) 1 2 Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.) 3 Select A V 3 input source using the I N P U T button on the remote control. ! NOTE G If you have a mono VCR, connect the audio cable from the VCR to the A U D I O L / M O N O jack of the TV. S-VIDEO VIDEO OUTPUT SWITCH L R ANT IN ANT OUT 43 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Connecting with a S-Video cable (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) S-VIDEO Connect the S-VIDEO output of the VCR to the S V I D E O input on the TV set. The picture quality is improved; compared to normal composite (RCA cable) input. 1 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 2 Connect the audio outputs of the VCR to the A U D I O input jacks on the TV. 3 Insert a video tape into the VCR and press PLAY on the VCR. (Refer to the VCR owner’s manual.) 4 Select A V 3 input source with using the I N P U T button on the remote control. VIDEO L R OUTPUT SWITCH 1 ANT IN ANT OUT 2 ! NOTE G If both S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets have been connected to the S-VHS VCR simultaneously, only the S-VIDEO can be received. INSERTION OF CI MODULE - To view the encrypted (pay) services in digital TV mode. - This feature is not available in all countries. 1 Insert the CI Module to P C M C I A (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association) C A R D S L O T of TV as shown. For further information, see p.77. ! NOTE G Check if the CI module is inserted into the PCMCIA card slot in the right direction. If the module is not inserted properly, this can cause damage to the TV and the PCMCIA card slot. 44 1 Check this point as shown and insert the CI Module. DIGITAL AUDIO OUT SETUP Sending the TV’s audio signal to external audio equipment via the Digital Audio Output (Optical) port. If you want to enjoy digital broadcasting through 5.1-channel speakers, connect the OPTICAL DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal on the back of TV to a Home Theater (or amp). Connect one end of an optical cable to the TV Digital Audio (Optical) Output port. 2 Connect the other end of the optical cable to the digital audio (Optical) input on the audio equipment. 3 Set the “TV Speaker option - Off ” in the AUDIO menu.(Gp .132). Refer to the external audio equipment instruction manual for operation. 1 2 CAUTION G Do not look into the optical output port. Looking at the laser beam may damage your vision. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 HEADPHONE SETUP (Except for 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) You can listen the sound through the headphone. 1 Plug the headphone into the headphone socket. 2 + or To adjust the headphone volume, press the - button. If you press the MUTE button, the sound from the headphone is switched off. ! NOTE G G G A U D I O menu items are disabled when connecting a headphone. When changing A V M O D E with a headphone connected, the change is applied to video but not to audio. Optical Digital Audio Out is not available when connecting a headphone. 45 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP OTHER A/V SOURCE SETUP (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**, 32/37/42LF25**) Camcorder Video Game Set EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 46 VIDEO L R 1 1 V I D E O jacks between TV and external equipment. Match the jack colours. Connect the A U D I O/V (Video = yellow, Audio Left = white, and Audio Right = red) 2 Select A V 3 input source with using the I N P U T button on the remote control. 3 Operate the corresponding external equipment. Refer to external equipment operating guide. USB SETUP (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) 1 Connect the USB device to the U S B I N jack on the TV. 2 After connecting the U S B I N jack, you use the U S B function. (G p .96) EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 47 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP PC SETUP This TV provides Plug and Play capability, meaning that the PC adjusts automatically to the TV's settings. Connecting with a D-sub 15 pin cable EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 Connect the RGB output of the PC to the R G B I N ( P C ) jack on the TV. 2 Connect the PC audio output to the A U D I O I N ( R G B / D V I ) jack on the TV. 3 Turn on the PC and the TV 2 4 1 Select R G B input source using the INPUT button on the remote control. AUDIO 48 RGB OUTPUT Connecting with an HDMI to DVI cable Connect the DVI output of the PC to the H D M I / D V I I N 1 jack on the TV. 2 Connect the PC audio output to the A U D I O I N ( R G B / D V I ) jack on the TV. 3 Turn on the PC and the TV. 4 Select H D M I 1 input source using the INPUT button on the remote control. 1 DVI-PC OUTPUT 2 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP 1 AUDIO 49 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Supported Display Resolution Plasma TV Models HDMI/DVI-DTV mode RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Resolution Horizontal Frequency(kHz) Vertical Frequency(Hz) Resolution Horizontal Frequency(kHz) Vertical Frequency(Hz) 720x400 31.468 70.08 640x480 31.649 59.94 640x480 31.469 59.94 31.469 60 800x600 37.879 60.31 31.47 59.94 720x480 1024x768 48.363 60.00 31.50 60 1280x768 47.78 59.87 720x576 31.25 50.00 1360x768 47.72 59.80 1280x720 37.50 50.00 1920x1080 66.587 59.934 44.96 59.94 1280x1024 63.98 60.02 45.00 60 1400x1050 65.317 59.979 28.125 50.00 33.72 59.94 33.75 60 1920x1080 (Except for 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**) 27.00 24.00 33.750 30 56.25 50.00 67.433 59.94 67.50 60 LCD TV Models / LED LCD TV Models HDMI/DVI-DTV mode RGB-PC, HDMI/DVI-PC mode Vertical Frequency(Hz) Resolution Horizontal Frequency(kHz) Vertical Frequency(Hz) 31.468 70.08 720x480 31.469/31.5 59.94/60 31.469 59.94 720x576 31.25 50 800x600 37.879 60.31 1280x720 37.5 50 1024x768 48.363 60.00 44.96/45 59.94/60 33.72/33.75 59.94/60 28.125 50 26.97/27 23.97/24 33.716/33.75 29.976/30.00 Resolution Horizontal Frequency(kHz) 720x400 640x480 1280x768 47.78 59.87 1360x768 47.72 59.80 1280x1024 63.595 60.00 1920x1080 66.587 59.93 67.5 60.00 1440x900 55.5 59.90 1400x1050 64.744 59.948 1680x1050 65.16 59.94 (RGB-PC) 1920x1080 (HDMI-PC) 50 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20** , 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,26LG31**) (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**,19/22/26LG 31**) (Only 19LG31**) (Only 22LG31**) 1920x1080 56.25 50 67.43/67.5 59.94/60 ! NOTE G G G G We recommend using 1920x1080, 60 Hz (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**), 1360x768, 60 Hz (Only 19/22LU40**, 19LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**, 50PQ35**), 1024x768, 60 Hz (Only 42PQ35**, 42PQ65**) , 1440x900, 60 Hz (Only 19LG31**) , 1680x1050, 60 Hz (Only 22LG31**)for the PC mode, this should provide the best picture quality. G G G G G G Connect the signal cable from the monitor output port of the PC to the RGB (PC) port of the TV or the signal cable from the HDMI output port of the PC to the HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) port on the TV. Connect the audio cable from the PC to the Audio input on the TV. (Audio cables are not included with the TV). If using a sound card, adjust PC sound as required. If the graphic card on the PC does not output analogue and digital RGB simultaneously, connect only one of either RGB or HDMI IN (or HDMI/DVI IN) to display the PC output on the TV. If the graphic card on the PC does output analogue and digital RGB simultaneously, set the TV to either RGB or HDMI; (the other mode is set to Plug and Play automatically by the TV.) DOS mode may not work depending on the video card if you use an HDMI to DVI cable. If you use too long an RGB-PC cable that is too long, there may be interference on the screen. We recommend using under 5m of cable. This provides the best picture quality. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP G Avoid keeping a fixed image on the set’s screen for prolonged periods of time. The fixed image may become permanently imprinted on the screen; use a screen saver when possible. There may be interference relating to resolution, vertical pattern, contrast or brightness in PC mode. Change the PC mode to another resolution or change the refresh rate to another rate or adjust the brightness and contrast on the menu until the picture is clear. If the refresh rate of the PC graphic card can not be changed, change the PC graphic card or consult the manufacturer of the PC graphic card. The synchronization input waveform for Horizontal and Vertical frequencies are separate. 51 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Screen Setup for PC mode Screen Reset Returns Position, Size and Phase to the factory default settings. This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC]. EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP PICTURE Move SCREEN OK E • Contrast 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 Auto Config. Position R G Size • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Prev. Resolution 90 • Brightness Move To Set Yes No Phase Screen Screen Reset 1 MENU 2 Select P I C T U R E. OK Select S c r e e n. OK Select R e s e t. OK Select Y e s. 3 4 5 OK Run R e s e t. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 52 Adjustment for screen Position, Size, Phase If the picture is not clear after auto adjustment and especially if characters are still trembling, adjust the picture phase manually. This function works in the following mode : RGB[PC]. Move SCREEN OK Move Prev. E • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 Resolution Auto Config. Position R G Size • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Phase Screen Screen Reset 1 MENU EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP PICTURE Select P I C T U R E. 2 OK 3 OK 4 OK 5 OK Select S c r e e n. Select P o s i t i o n, S i z e or P h a s e. Make appropriate adjustments. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 53 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Selecting Resolution To view a normal picture, match the resolution of RGB mode and selection of PC mode. This function works in the following mode: RGB[PC] EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP SCREEN PICTURE Move Resolution E • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 Move Prev. OK Auto Config. 1024 x 768 1280 x 768 1360 x 768 Position R G Size • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Screen Screen 1 MENU 2 Phase Reset Select P I C T U R E. OK Select S c r e e n. OK Select R e s o l u t i o n. 3 4 OK 5 Select the desired resolution. OK • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 54 Auto Configure (RGB [PC] mode only) Automatically adjusts the picture position and minimizes image instability. After adjustment, if the image is still not correct, your TV is functioning properly but needs further adjustment. PICTURE Move SCREEN OK E • Contrast 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Tint 0 Prev. Resolution 90 • Brightness Move Auto Config. Position R G Size To Set Yes No • Advanced Control • Picture Reset Phase EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT SETUP Auto configure This function is for automatic adjustment of the screen position, size, and phase The displayed image will be unstable for a few seconds while the auto configuration is in progress. Screen Screen Reset 1 MENU Select P I C T U R E. • If the position of the image is still not correct, try Auto adjustment again. 2 • If picture needs to be adjusted again after Auto OK Select S c r e e n. OK Select A u t o C o n f i g .. OK Select Y e s. adjustment in RGB (PC), you can adjust the P o s i t i o n, S i z e or P h a s e. 3 4 5 OK Run A u t o C o n f i g .. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 55 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS (Only 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 32/42/47LF51**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV. ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV. (G p . 1 1 6) RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture. (G p . 1 1 3) POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby. INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence. (G p . 8 0) WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel. Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep Timer, Favourite, USB Device).(G p . 6 3) MENU Selects a menu. Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu.(G p . 6 4) GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(G p . 1 1 0) THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust (Up/Down/Left/ the system settings to your preference. Right) OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode. RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction function. INFO i Shows the present screen information. AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices.(G p . 8 6) Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on T E L E T E X T buttons models only) , P r o g r a m m e e d i t. 1 1 1 TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext. BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(G p . 1 4 9) SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. See a list of AV devices connected to TV. When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears at the screen.(G p . 8 3) 56 VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN MARK Check and un-check programmes in the USB menu. FAV Displays the selected favourite programme. MUTE Switches the sound on or off. PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next UP/DOWN one. 0~9 number Selects a programme. button Selects numbered items in a menu. LIST Displays the programme table.(G p . 7 8) Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. SIMPLINK / USB Menu control buttons Controls SIMPLINK or USB menu(Photo List and Music List or Movie List (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)). WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Programme Selects a programme. UP/DOWN FREEZE Pause the present picture at the screen.(Plasma TV only) Installing Batteries ■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity (+ with +,- with -). ■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones. ■ Close cover. ■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse. 57 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS (Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 42/50PQ35**) When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV. TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel. AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices.(G p . 8 6) POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby. POWER AV MODE INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence. (G p . 8 0) ENERGY SAVING WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV. (G p . 1 1 6) 0~9 number Selects a programme. button Selects numbered items in a menu. Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. LIST Q.VIEW LIST Displays the programme table.(G p . 7 8) MUTE THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust (Up/Down/Left/Right) the system settings to your preference. OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode. MENU Selects a menu. Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu.(G p . 6 4) RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction function. RETURN / EXIT MENU Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on T E L E T E X T buttons models only) , P r o g r a m m e e d i t. 1 Q.MENU INFO i GUIDE MARK FAV 1 TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext. BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(G p . 1 4 9) SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. See a list of AV devices connected to TV. When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears at the screen.(G p . 8 3) 58 VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN MUTE Switches the sound on or off. POWER AV MODE ENERGY SAVING Programme Selects a programme. UP/DOWN SIMPLINK Controls SIMPLINK. control buttons LIST Q.VIEW MUTE Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep Timer, Favourite, Energy Saving.)(G p . 6 3) INFO i Shows the present screen information. GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(G p . 1 1 0) WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next UP/DOWN one. FAV Displays the selected favourite programme. MARK Select the input to apply the Picture Wizard settings. RETURN / EXIT MENU Q.MENU INFO i Installing Batteries GUIDE MARK FAV ■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -). ■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones. ■ Close cover. ■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse. 59 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL REMOTE CONTROL KEY FUNCTIONS (Only 42/47LH90**) When using the remote control, aim it at the remote control sensor on the TV. POWER Switches the TV on from standby or off to standby. POWER ON/OFF ON/OFF Key lighting on or off. TV/RAD TV/RAD Selects Radio, TV and DTV channel. ENERGY SAVING Adjust the Energy Saving mode of the TV.(G p . 1 1 6) INFO i Shows the present screen information. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL INPUT External input mode rotate in regular sequence.(G p . 8 0) 0~9 number Selects a programme. button Selects numbered items in a menu. LIST Displays the programme table. (G p . 7 8) Q.VIEW Returns to the previously viewed programme. MARK MENU Selects a menu. Clears all on-screen displays and returns to TV viewing from any menu.(G p . 6 4) FAV Q. MENU Select the desired quick menu source. (Aspect Ratio, Clear Voice II , Picture Mode, Sound Mode, Audio, Sleep Timer, Favourite, USB Device).(G p . 6 3) THUMBSTICK Allows you to navigate the on-screen menus and adjust (Up/Down/Left/Right) the system settings to your preference. OK Accepts your selection or displays the current mode. GUIDE Shows programme schedule.(G p . 1 1 0) RETURN(EXIT) Allows the user to move return one step in an interactive application, EPG or other user interaction function. Coloured These buttons are used for teletext (on T E L E T E X T buttons models only) , P r o g r a m m e e d i t. 1 1 AV MODE TELETEXT These buttons are used for teletext. BUTTONS For further details, see the ‘Teletext’ section.(G p . 1 4 9) RATIO SUBTITLE Recalls your preferred subtitle in digital mode. 60 POWER VOLUME UP Adjusts the volume. /DOWN ON/OFF TV/RAD FAV Displays the selected favourite programme. MARK Check and un-check programmes in the USB menu. MUTE Switches the sound on or off. PAGE Move from one full set of screen information to the next UP/DOWN one. SIMPLINK / Controls SIMPLINK or USB menu(Photo List and Music USB Menu List or Movie List ). control buttons MARK FAV See a list of AV devices connected to TV. When you toggle this button, the Simplink menu appears at the screen.(G p . 8 3) RATIO Selects your desired Aspect Ratio of picture.(G p . 1 1 3) WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Programme Selects a programme. UP/DOWN AV MODE It helps you select and set images and sounds when connecting AV devices.(G p . 8 6) Installing Batteries AV MODE RATIO ■ Open the battery compartment cover on the back and install the batteries matching correct polarity (+with +,-with -). ■ Install two 1.5 V AAA batteries. Do not mix old or used batteries with new ones. ■ Close cover. ■ To remove the batteries, perform the installation actions in reverse. 61 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL TURNING ON THE TV - When your TV is turned on, you will be able to use its features. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL 1 Firstly, connect the power cord correctly. And switch the M a i n P o w e r S w i t c h on TV. (Only 42/47LH90**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**) At this stage, the TV switches to standby mode. 2 In standby mode to turn TV on, press the r / I(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), INPUT or P D E (or P ) button on the TV or press the POWER, INPUT, P or NUMBER button on the remote control and the TV will switch on. Initializing setup If the OSD (On Screen Display) is displayed on the screen after turning on the TV, you can adjust the L a n g u a g e, M o d e S e t t i n g, C o u n t r y, A u t o T u n i n g. Note: a. If you close without completing the initial setting, the Initial Setting menu can be displayed again. b. Press the RETURN button to change the current OSD to the previous OSD. c. For those countries without confirmed DTV broadcasting standards, some DTV features might not work, depending on the DTV broadcasting environment. d. "Home Use” mode is the optimal setting for home environments, and is the TV's default mode. e. "Store Demo" mode is the optimal setting for store environments. If a user modifies image quality data, “Store Demo” mode initializes the product to the image quality set by us after a certain period of time. f. The mode (Home Use, Store Demo) can be changed by executing Mode Setting in the OPTION menu. PROGRAMME SELECTION 1 Press the P number. or NUMBER buttons to select a programme VOLUME ADJUSTMENT 1 Press the + or - button to adjust the volume. If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button. You can cancel this function by pressing the MUTE, + , - or AV Mode button. 62 QUICK MENU Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual. Q.Menu (Quick Menu) is a menu of features which users might use frequently. F Aspect Ratio G 16:9 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) 1Q. MENU 2 A u d i o : Selects the sound output. S l e e p T i m e r : Sets the sleep timer. F a v o u r i t e : Selects the favourite programme. USB Device : Selects “Eject” in order to eject USB device.(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) E n e r g y S a v i n g : Selects your desired Energy Saving mode. (Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) F Aspect Ratio G 16:9 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL A s p e c t R a t i o: Selects your desired picture format. For Zoom Setting, select 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to Q.Menu. C l e a r V o i c e I I : By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better. P i c t u r e M o d e : Selects your desired Picture Mode. S o u n d M o d e : It is a feature to automatically set the sound combination which it deems the best for the images being watched. Selects your desired Sound Mode. (Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) Display each menu. Select your desired Source. 3 • Press the Q . M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. OK • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 63 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL ON SCREEN MENUS SELECTION AND ADJUSTMENT Your TV's OSD (On Screen Display) may differ slightly from that shown in this manual. SETUP Move PICTURE OK Move Auto Tuning Aspect Ratio Manual Tuning Picture Wizard Programme Edit : Off Software Update : On Auto Volume Clear Voice II Energy Saving Booster AUDIO OK : 16:9 : Off Picture Mode Move : Off • Level : Standard • Backlight Balance 70 Sound Mode 3 - + 0 L R : Standard Diagnostics • Contrast 90 • SRS TruSurround XT : Off CI Information • Brightness 50 • Treble 50 • Sharpness 70 • Bass 50 E WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL OPTION Move Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Hard of Hearing( Country OK : Off E TIME OK Move OK Clock SETUP PICTURE AUDIO TIME ) : Off Off Time : Off On Time : Off Sleep Timer : Off : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On OPTION : Off Key Lock LOCK BLUETOOTH E USB or (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) INPUT LOCK Move Lock System OK : Off BLUETOOTH Move INPUT OK Move OK USB Bluetooth : Off Antenna Photo List Set Password TV PIN : 0000 AV1 Music List Block Programme Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected AV2 Movie List AV3 DivX Reg. Code Component Deactivation Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. or Move OK RGB HDMI1 HDMI2 E (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) 1 MENU Select a menu item. OK OK (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) Display each menu. 2 3 (Only 32/37/42/47LH40**, 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) Move to the pop up menu. • Press the I N F O button, you can check the S i m p l e M a n u a l Menu. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. ! NOTE G G 64 G G It is possible to use I S M M e t h o d in P l a s m a T V models only. It is possible to use B a c k l i g h t, P o w e r I n d i c a t o r in L C D T V / L E D L C D T V models only. It is not possible to use C I I n f o r m a t i o n in Analogue mode. It is not possible to use B o o s t e r in Analogue mode.(Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING (For countries other than Finland and Sweden) Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes. When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted. The maximum number of programmes that can be stored is 500. But the number may differ slightly depending on broadcasting signals. SETUP Move OK SETUP Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Move OK Programme Edit : On Software Update Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information : On Check your antenna connection. The previous channel information will be updated during Auto Tuning. SECAM L Search Automatic Numbering Start Close 1 MENU Select S E T U P. • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass- O n’. word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O 2 • If you wish to keep on auto tuning select S t a r t OK Select A u t o T u n i n g. OK Select S t a r t. 3 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Auto Tuning using the button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select C l o s e. • A u t o m a t i c N u m b e r i n g: Decide whether to use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning. 4 OK Run A u t o t u n i n g. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 65 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING (Only for Finland and Sweden) DVB-C Auto Tuning is a menu for users in countries that support DVB cable. Use this to automatically find and store all available programmes. When you start auto programming, all previously stored service information will be deleted. If you want to select the A n t e n n a, SETUP Move OK SETUP WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update Move OK Please select your TV Connection. Check your antenna connection. The previous channel information will be updated during Auto Tuning. Programme Edit : On Software Update Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information : On SECAM L Search Automatic Numbering Antenna Cable Close 1 MENU Select S E T U P. Start Close • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass- O n’. word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O • If you wish to keep on auto tuning select S t a r t 2 OK Select A u t o T u n i n g. OK Select A n t e n n a. OK Select S t a r t. 3 4 using the button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select C l o s e. • A u t o m a t i c N u m b e r i n g: Decide whether to use the programme numbers as sent by broadcasting stations for tuning. 5 OK Run A u t o t u n i n g. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 66 If you want to select the C a b l e, SETUP Move OK SETUP Move OK Please select your TV Connection. Default Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Frequency(kHz) Programme Edit Programme Edit Symbol rate(kS/s) Software Update : On Software Update Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information : On Modulation G 362000 6875 640AM Network ID Antenna Cable Close 1 MENU F Auto Tuning 0 OK Close • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass- O n’. word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O Select S E T U P. • If you wish to keep on auto tuning, select O K using the button. Then, press the OK button. Otherwise select C l o s e. 2 OK Select A u t o T u n i n g. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. OK 4 OK Select C a b l e. 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 7 0 5 OK Make appropriate adjustments. Select S t a r t. 6 OK Run A u t o t u n i n g. The following values are needed in order to search all available programmes quickly and correctly. The commonly used values are provided as "default". However, for correct settings, please inquire of the cable service provider. When running Auto Tuning in DVB cable mode, selecting Full will search through all frequencies between 110 MHz and 862 MHz to find available channels. In the case when the programme is not searched by selecting the Default, perform the searching by selecting the Full. However, in the case when the programme is searched by selecting the Full, the Auto Tuning time can be taken too much. • F r e q u e n c y : Enter a user-defined frequency range. • S y m b o l r a t e : Enter a user-defined symbol rate (Symbol rate: Speed at which a device such as modem sends symbols to a channel). • M o d u l a t i o n : Enter a user-defined modulation. (Modulation: Loading of audio or video signals onto carrier). • N e t w o r k I D(Sweden only) : Unique identifier allocated for each user. Note G If you select C a b l e after checking either Finland or Sweden, you can see C h a n n e l A u t o U p d a t e menu of which the default value is O n. G If you keep it O n, the channel information will be automatically updated whenever the network information changes. G When C h a n n e l A u t o U p d a t e is O f f, the channel information will not be updated. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 3 AUTO PROGRAMME TUNING If you select the “ - - ” of Country Setting, (Except for Finland and Sweden) To watch DVB-C in the countries excluding Finland and Sweden, select '-- -' as the C o u n t r y in O P T I O N. You can select U s e r mode or F u l l mode in A u t o T u n i n g. The corresponding home frequency information may need to be changed when tuning the U s e r mode, and the corresponding information depends on the Cable Service Operator (SO) in service. During F u l l mode tuning, some channel may be restricted for some Cable Service Operator (SO), and it may take a long time for tuning. Note G Your cable provider may charge for their services, or require you to agree to its items and conditions of business. G DVB-C Cable may not operate correctly with some cable providers. G Compatibility with DVB-C digital cable broadcasts is not guaranteed. 67 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN DIGITAL MODE) Manual Tuning lets you manually add a programme to your programme list. (For countries other than Finland and Sweden & When selecting Antenna if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen) SETUP Move SETUP OK Move F WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Tuning Manual Manual Tuning Programme Edit Software Update : On OK Programme Edit UHF CH. Software Update : On Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information DTV G Your receiver will add this channel to your channel list. Bad 30 Normal Good Update Close 1 MENU Select S E T U P. • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass- O n’. word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O 2 OK Select M a n u a l T u n i n g. 3 OK Select D T V. 4 Select the desired channel number. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 68 (When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen) SETUP Move SETUP OK Move F OK DTV Auto Tuning Frequency(kHz) Manual Tuning Tuning Manual Manual Tuning Symbol rate(kS/s) Programme Edit Programme Edit Software Update : On Software Update Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information Modulation : On Bad G 362000 6875 640AM Normal Good Add Close 1 MENU Select S E T U P. 2 • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit passOK Select M a n u a l T u n i n g. OK Select D T V. O n’. word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Auto Tuning 3 4 OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Make appropriate adjustments. 0 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. Frequency, Symbol rate, and Modulation mode are needed in order to add a programme correctly in DVB cable mode. Please inquire of the cable service provider about the correct values. 69 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL MANUAL PROGRAMME TUNING (IN ANALOGUE MODE) Manual Tuning lets you manually tune and arrange the stations in whatever order you desire. SETUP Move OK SETUP Move Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Programme Edit WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Software Update : On Diagnostics TV F Storage Software Update G 3 : OnSystem BG Band V/UHF Diagnostics CI Information OK CI Information Channel 0 Fine F G Search F G Name C 02 Store Close 1 MENU 2 OK Select S E T U P. Select M a n u a l T u n i n g. 6 Select V / U H F or C a b l e. 7 or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select the desired channel number. 0 8 3 OK Select T V. Commence searching. 9 4 or 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 7 Select the desired programme number on. OK Select S t o r e. 0 5 Select a TV system. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. O n’. • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit password in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O • L : SECAM L/L’ (France) B G : PAL B/G, SECAM B/G (Europe / East Europe / Asia / New Zealand / M.East / Africa / Australia) I : PAL I/II (U.K. / Ireland / Hong Kong / South Africa) D K : PAL D/K, SECAM D/K (East Europe / China / Africa / CIS) • To store another channel, repeat steps 4 to 9. 70 SETUP Move SETUP OK Move Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Programme Edit Software Update : On F Software Update Diagnostics TV G Storage : On System BG Band V/UHF Diagnostics CI Information OK CI Information 3 Channel 0 Fine F G Search F G Name C 02 Store A Assigning a station name You can assign a station name with five characters to each programme number. 1 MENU 5 Select S E T U P. 2 OK Select M a n u a l T u n i n g. OK 6 3 OK 7 A Select C l o s e. Select T V. OK 4 Select the position and make your choice of the second character, and so on. You can use an the alphabet A to Z , the number 0 to 9 , +/ -, and blank. OK OK Select S t o r e. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Close Select N a m e. Fine Tuning (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) Normally fine tuning is only necessary if reception is poor. 1 MENU Select S E T U P. 4 OK Select M a n u a l T u n i n g. 5 OK Select T V. 6 2 3 Select F i n e. Fine tune for the best picture and sound. OK Select S t o r e. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 71 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL PROGRAMME EDIT When a programme number is skipped, it means that you will be unable to select it using P viewing. button during TV If you wish to select the skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the Programme edit menu. This function enables you to skip the stored programmes. You can change the programme number using “Move”function, if “Automatic Numbering” is unchecked when you start Auto Tuning. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL 1 SETUP Move YLE TV1 OK Auto Tuning RADIO 2 YLE TV2 4 TV4 Stockholm 5 YLE FST 6 CNN Manual Tuning : On Diagnostics CI Information TV 8 YLE24 9 YLE Teema Programme Edit Edit Programme Software Update DTV 1 YLE TV1 14 TV4 Film 24 TV4 Fakta 50 TV400 24 TV4 Fakta 84 Kanal Lokal 24 TV4 Fakta 86 Info/3sat 87 Doku/Kika 88 TVE 1 E Pr. Change Navigation P Page Change Previous Skip 1 MENU Select S E T U P. • Use NUMBER buttons to input a 4-digit pass- O n’. word in L o c k S y s t e m ‘O 2 OK Select P r o g r a m m e E d i t. 3 OK 4 Enter the P r o g r a m m e E d i t. Select a programme to be stored or skipped. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 72 IN DTV/RADIO MODE A Skipping a programme number 1 • When programmes are to be skipped, the skipped programme shows in blue and these programmes will not be selected by the P buttons during TV viewing. Select a programme number to be skipped. 2 BLUE Turn the programme number to blue. 3 • If you wish to select a skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the programme edit or EPG. BLUE Release. This function enables you to delete or skip the stored programmes. You can also move some channels and use other programme numbers. A Deleting a programme 1 Select a programme number to be deleted. 2 RED Turn the programme number to red. 3 RED Delete. BLUE Release. • The selected programme is deleted, all the fol- lowing programmes are shifted up one Moving a programme A 3 1 Select a programme number to be moved. 2 Turn the programme number to green. GREEN A GREEN Release. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL IN TV MODE Auto Sort 1 • After activating Auto Sort once, you can no longer edit programmes. YELLOW Start Auto Sort. A Skipping a programme number 1 Select a programme number to be skipped. 2 BLUE Turn the programme number to blue. 3 • When a programme number is skipped it means that you will be unable to select it using the P button during normal TV viewing. • If you wish to select a skipped programme, directly enter the programme number with the NUMBER buttons or select it in the programme edit or EPG. BLUE Release. 73 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL BOOSTER (IN DIGITAL MODE) (Except for 32/37/42/47LH70**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) If reception is poor select Booster to On. When the signal is strong, select "Off". SETUP Move OK SETUP WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Auto Tuning Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Programme Edit Booster Booster : On Booster Booster Software Update Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information 1 MENU OK Programme Edit : On Software Update Move Off : On On On : On Select S E T U P. 2 Select B o o s t e r. OK 3 Select O n or O f f. OK 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 74 SOFTWARE UPDATE Software Update means software can be downloaded through the digital terrestrial broadcasting system. SETUP Move SETUP OK Auto Tuning Manual Tuning Manual Tuning Software Update On :: On Software Update Diagnostics Diagnostics CI Information CI Information 4 OK Save. * When setting “Software Update” Software update is available. Would you like to download now? (approximately 30 Min ~ 2 hours) Your TV software is updated when you turn off the TV using the remote control or local key. Do not unplug! Yes No Simple Update :for current update stream A new software update is available at 00/00/0 00:00. Do you want to update the software when available? Yes Select the Y e s using the button and you will see the following picture. After the Software Update is complete, the System restarts. Software downloading progress. Ver. 03.02.00 Ver. 03.01.00 E Occasionally, a transmission of updated digital software information will result in the following menu on the TV screen. i New Software is successfully installed. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL OK Select S o f t w a r e U p d a t e. OK Off On :: On On On Select O n or O f f. • If you select O n, a user confirm message box will be displayed to notify that new software is found. 3 Select S E T U P. 2 OK Programme Edit Programme Edit 1 MENU Move Auto Tuning 65% Hide Stop When the power is turned off, downloading starts. When the power is turned on while updating, the progress status is displayed. No Schedule Update : for scheduled update stream When the Software Update O f f", the message to menu is "O O n" appears. change it to "O - During Progress of a Software Update, please note the following: • Power to the TV must not be interrupted. • The TV must not be switched off. • The antenna must not be disconnected. • After Software Update, you can confirm the updated software version in Diagnostics menu. • It may take hours to download the software, so make sure that the power stays on during the download. 75 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL DIAGNOSTICS This function enables you to view information on the Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and Software Version. This displays the information and signal strength of the tuned *MUX. This displays the signal information and service name of the selected MUX. (*MUX: A higher directory of channels in digital broadcasting (a single MUX contains multiple channels.)) Engineering Diagnostics SETUP Move Manufacturer : LG Electronics Inc. Model/Type : 42LH7000 Serial No. : SKJY1107 Software Version : V1.10.00 OK Auto Tuning WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Manual Tuning D CH 30 CH 34 Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CH 36 CI Information CH 38 CH 54 CH 60 E Prev. 1 MENU Exit Select D i a g n o s t i c s. OK OK MENU Select S E T U P. 2 3 Popup Display Manufacturer, Model/Type, Serial Number and Software Version. 4 OK Display the information of Channel. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 76 CI [COMMON INTERFACE] INFORMATION This function enables you to watch some encrypted services (pay services). If you remove the CI Module, you cannot watch pay services. When the module is inserted into the CI slot, you can access the module menu. To purchase a module and smart card, contact your dealer. Do not repeatedly insert or remove a CI module from the TV. This may cause a malfunction. When the TV is turned on after inserting a CI Module, you may not have any sound output. This may be incompatible with the CI module and smart card. CI (Common Interface) functions may not be possible depending upon the country broadcasting circumstances. Move Viaccess Module OK Consultations Auto Tuning Authorizations Manual Tuning Module information Programme Edit Software Update : On Diagnostics CI Information Select the item • This OSD is only for illustration and the menu options and screen format will vary according to the Digital pay services provider. • It is possible for you to change CI (Common Interface) menu screen and service by consulting your dealer. 1 MENU WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL i SETUP Select S E T U P. 2 OK Select C I I n f o r m a t i o n. OK Select the desired item: Module information, smart card information, language, or software download etc. 3 4 OK Save. • Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing. 77 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL SELECTING THE PROGRAMME LIST You can check which programmes are stored in the memory by displaying the programme list. Mini Glossary Programme List Displayed when the Locked Programme. 1 BBC 2 BBC 3 BBC WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Exit 1Displaying programme LIST A Display the Programme List. LIST A 2 Select a programme. OK TV/RAD The mode will be switched between TV, DTV, and Radio from the program you are currently watching. Switch to the chosen programme number. Paging through a programme list 1 P 78 have been set up to be skipped by auto programming or in the programme edit mode. • Some programmes with the channel number shown in the programme LIST indicate there is no station name assigned. Selecting a programme in the programme list 1 A • You may find some blue programmes. These P A G E Turn the pages. 2 LIST Return to normal TV viewing. FAVOURITE PROGRAMME SETUP A Selecting favourite programme Favorite programmes is a convenient feature that lets you quickly scan up to programmes of your choice without having to wait for the TV to scan through all the in-between programmes. F G Favourite F Favourite (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) 1 P or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2Q. MENU G (Only 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51**) 3 Select your desired programme. 4Q. MENU Select F a v o u r i t e. Select F a v o u r i t e . Return to TV viewing. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Favourite Favourite • This will automatically include the selected programme into your favourite programme list. A Displaying the favourite programme list Favourite List 1 MARK 1 BBC Display the Favourite Programme List. FAV 2 BBC 3 BBC Exit 79 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL INPUT LIST HDMI and AV1, 2 (SCART) can be recognized by a detect pin and thus enabled only when an external device approves voltage. By using T V / R A D button, you can move from External Input to RF Input and to the last watched programme in DTV/RADIO/TV mode. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL 80 Antenna AV1 AV2 AV3 Component HDMI4 HDMI3 HDMI2 HDMI1 RGB (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) (Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**) (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) 1 INPUT OK Select the input source. • A n t e n n a or C a b l e : Select it when watching the DTV/TV. (Digital cable input is available only at Finland, Sweden and “--” country) • A V 1, A V 2, A V 3 : Select it when watching the VCR or external equipment. • C o m p o n e n t : Select it when using the DVD or the Digital set-top box depends on connector. • R G B :Select it when using PC depends on connector. • H D M I 1, H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), H D M I 3(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**),, H D M I 4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) : Select it when using DVD, PC or Digital set-top box depend on connector. DATA SERVICE (This menu is enabled only in Ireland. ) This function allow users to choose between M H E G ( D i g i t a l T e l e t e x t ) and T e l e t e x t if both exist at the same time. If only one of them exists, either M H E G or T e l e t e x t is enabled regardless of which option you selected. OPTION Move OPTION OK Move Menu Language : English Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Subtitle Language Hard of Hearing( ) : Off Hard of Hearing( : English ) : Off Data Data Service Service :: MHEG MHEG Data Data Service Service :: MHEG MHEG MHEG Country : Ireland Country : Ireland Teletext Input Label OK Input Label SIMPLINK : On SIMPLINK E : On E OK Select O P T I O N. Select M H E G or T e l e t e x t. 4 2 OK Select D a t a S e r v i c e. OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. INPUT LABEL Selects a label for each input source. OPTION Move OK AV1 OPTION Move Menu Language : English Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Audio Language : English : English Subtitle Language Subtitle Language Hard of Hearing( Country ) : Off : UK Hard of Hearing( : English ) : Off Country : UK Input Label Input Label OK AV2 AV3 Component RGB HDMI1 (Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**) HDMI2 SIMPLINK : On SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Key Lock : Off HDMI3 HDMI4 E E Close (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) 1 MENU WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL 3 1 MENU (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) 3 Select OPTION. 2 OK Select the source. 4 OK Select Input Label. Select the label. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 81 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL SIMPLE MANUAL You can easily and effectively access the TV information by viewing a simple manual on the TV. During the Simple Manual operation, audio will be muted. OPTION Move Audio Language Subtitle Language WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Hard of Hearing( Country OK : English : English ) : Off : UK Input Label SIMPLINK : On Key Lock Simple Simple Manual Manual : Off E 1 MENU Select OPTION. 2 OK Select Simple Manual. OK Select the part of the manual you want to see. 3 • Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing. 82 This function operates only with devices with the SIMPLINK logo. Please check the SIMPLINK logo. This TV might not function properly when using it with other products with HDMI-CEC function. This allows you to control and play other AV devices connected to the display through HDMI cable without additional cables and settings. O f f”. If you do not want SIMPLINK menu,select “O Move Menu Language OPTION Move Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Subtitle Language Hard of Hearing( Country ) : Off : UK Input Label Hard of Hearing( Country SIMPLINK : On SIMPLINK Key Lock : Off Key Lock OK : English ) : Off : UK Input Label E 1 MENU OK : English Off : On On On : Off E Select O P T I O N. 2 OK Select S I M P L I N K. OK Select O n or O f f. 3 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL OPTION 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 83 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Connecting to Home Theater with the SIMPLINK logo. 1 Connect the H D M I / D V I I N 1, H D M I I N 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**),, H D M I I N 3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) or H D M I I N 4 (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) terminal on the back of the TV and the HDMI output terminal of the Home Theater using HDMI cables. WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL 2 Connect the Digital Audio output terminal on the back of the TV and the Digital Audio input terminal of the Home Theater using optical cables. 3 Select Home Theater in the Speaker menu by pushing the S I M P L I N K button. G 1 2 Home Theater When you select or operate a media device with home theater function, the speaker automatically switches to home theater speaker (HT speaker). ! NOTE Connect the HDMI/DVI IN or HDMI IN terminal of the TV to the terminal (HDMI terminal) of the SIMPLINK device with the HDMI cable. G When you switch the Input source using the INPUT button on the remote control, you can stop the operation of a device controlled by SIMPLINK. G 84 SIMPLINK Functions SIMPLINK Menu button and then OK button to select the desired SIMPLINK source. T V v i e w i n g : Switch to the previous TV programme regardless of the current mode. 2 D I S C p l a y b a c k : Select and play connected discs. When multiple discs are available, the titles of discs are conveniently displayed at the bottom of the screen. 1 2 E 1 E Press the Selected Device When device is not connected (displayed in gray) 3 5 E H D D R e c o r d i n g s p l a y b a c k : Play and control recordings stored in HDD. 4 E 5 When a device is connected (displayed in bright colour) E 4 V C R p l a y b a c k : Play and control the connected VCR. E 3 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL Disc playback Control connected AV devices by pressing the , OK, G, A, l l, FF and GG buttons. Direct Play After connecting AV devices to the TV, you can directly control the devices and play media without additional settings. Select AV device Enables you to select one of the AV devices connected to the TV and operate it. Power off all devices When you switch off the TV, all connected devices are turned off. Switch audio-out Offers an easy way to switch audio-out. Sync Power on When the equipment with Simplink function connected HDMI terminal starts to play, The TV will change automatically to turn on mode. * A device, which is connected to the TV through an HDMI cable but does not support SIMPLINK, does not provide this function. Note: To operate SIMPLINK, an HDMI cable over Version 1.3 with *CEC function should be used. (*CEC: Consumer Electronics Control). Change Device OK Audio Out to Home theater/Audio Out to TV: Select Home theater or TV speaker for Audio Out. • Home theater: Only one supported at a time • DVD, Recorder: Up to one(19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**), two(19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 26/32/37/42LH20**, 26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**), three(32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/37/42/47LH40**, 26LU50**, 32/42/47LF51**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) or four(32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) supported at a time. • VCR: Only one supported at a time 85 WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL AV MODE You can select the optimal images and sounds when connecting AV devices to external input. Off Cinema Sport Game WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL 1AV MODE Disables the AV MODE. Optimizes video and audio for watching movies. Optimizes video and audio for watching sports events. Optimizes video and audio for playing games. Off Cinema Game Sport Press the AV MODE button repeatedly to select the desired source. 2 OK • If you select C i n e m a in AV mode, C i n e m a will be selected both for P i c t u r e M o d e and S o u n d M o d e in P I C T U R E menu and A U D I O menu respectively. O f f” in AV mode, the picture and image which you ini• If you select “O tially set will be selected. 86 INITIALIZING (RESET TO ORIGINAL FACTORY SETTINGS) This function initializes all settings. D a y and N i g h t of the P i c t u r e M o d e cannot be initialized. But the settings of It is useful to initialize the product or when you move to other city or country. When the Factory Reset is completed, you must restart the Initializing setup. O n", the message to enter the password appears. When the L o c k S y s t e m menu is "O Move OK OPTION E : On SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Key Lock : Off Set ID Simple Manual :1 Power Indicator Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Factory Reset Factory Reset 2 OK OK E SIMPLINK Simple Manual 1 MENU Move Select O P T I O N. Set ID : 1 settings and channel All user Power Indicatorsettings will be reset. Still Demo Mode Continue? : On Mode Setting Factory FactoryReset Reset : Store Demo Yes No WATCHING TV / PROGRAMME CONTROL OPTION O n", if you forget your password, • In L o c k S y s t e m "O press '7', '7', '7', '7' on the remote control handset. Select F a c t o r y R e s e t. 3 OK Select Y e s. OK Start Factory Reset. 4 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 87 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH (Only 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) Bluetooth? Bluetooth is a short distance networking technology using 2.4 GHz frequency to connect various types of information devices such as computers, cell phones and PDAs, as well as digital appliances through wireless connection, without having to connect any cable, to enable data exchange. With the Bluetooth communication function, you can connect the Bluetooth enabled wireless headset or receive images(only JPEG), listen to music from the Bluetooth enabled cell phone using this TV. • Communication Spec.: Bluetooth Specification Version 2.0 + EDR (Enhanced Data Rate) • Output: Bluetooth Specification Power Class 2 • Maximum Communication Range: Line of open sight approx. 10 m (30 ft) • Frequency Band: 2.4 GHz band (2.4 GHz to 2.4835 GHz) • Bluetooth Module: EAX57538201 (LG Electronics) • Compatible Bluetooth Profile : GAVDP(Generic Audio/Video Distribution Profile) A2DP(Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) HSP(Headset Profile) OPP(Object Push Profile) BIP(Basic Imaging Profile) FTP(File Transfer Profile) TO USE THE BLUETOOTH Precautions when using the Bluetooth Use within 10 m(-45° to 45°) range. If you use the device out of the range or within the range with obstacles, it can result in communication error. G Communication error can occur depending on the surrounding devices. G Products using the same frequency of 2.4 GHz (Wireless LAN, microwave oven etc.), can cause communication error by using the same frequency bandwidth. G The device search time differs depending on the number of Bluetooth devices and the operating situation. G The probability of search increases with less number of devices. G Electromagnetic wave can be interfered with applicable wireless devices. G Because applicable wireless devices have the possibility of electromagnetic wave interference, they cannot provide services related to human life. G You can only connect one Bluetooth device at a time. G You cannot receive photos(only JPEG) or listen to music from other Bluetooth devices while using the Bluetooth headset. For details of Bluetooth, refer to the user manual of the Bluetooth device. G G USB (Photo List, Music List, Movie List(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**)) and Bluetooth will not be supported at the same time. G Operation is subject to the following two conditions : (1) This device may not cause (harmful) interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation (of the device). G QDID(Qualified Design Identity) : B014836 88 0678 SETTING THE BLUETOOTH If you want to listen to the broadcasted sound using the Bluetooth headset or receive the jpeg images from an external device and view them on the TV, listen to music from cell phone(Bluetooth device), you can use the wireless communication without having to connect any cables. O n”. You can use the BLUETOOTH menu by selecting “O O f f”. If you do not want to use the Bluetooth function, select “O If it is connected to the external Bluetooth device, you can select “Off” after disconnecting the device. BLUETOOTH Move Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 OK BLUETOOTH Bluetooth Bluetooth TV PIN Move OK Off ::Off Off On :On 0000 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. My Bluetooth Info. 1 MENU Select B L U E T O O T H. TO USE THE BLUETOOTH Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected 2 OK Select B l u e t o o t h. OK Select O n or O f f. 3 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 89 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH SET TV PIN To accept connection from an external Bluetooth device or to connect to an external Bluetooth device, the PIN needs to be entered. For details on how to set the PIN of the external Bluetooth device, refer to the user manual of the applicable device. The TV PIN is composed of numbers of up to 10 digits. The TV PIN must have more than 1 digit. BLUETOOTH Move OK BLUETOOTH Move Bluetooth : Off Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 TV PIN PIN TV 0000 :: 0000 OK Set TV PIN Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device Registered Bluetooth Device My Bluetooth Info. My Bluetooth Info. E TO USE THE BLUETOOTH Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected 0 0 0 0_ Delete OK 1 MENU Select B L U E T O O T H. 2 OK 3 OK • Press the button to delete digits one by one. Select T V P I N. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Select the desired PIN number. 0 4 OK • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 90 BLUETOOTH HEADSET When you select the Bluetooth headset, you can listen to the TV sound in the Bluetooth headset through wireless communication. You must pair it with any new Bluetooth device before the first use. For details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device. A maximum of 12 devices can be paired. When the unit is searching for the Bluetooth headset, other buttons except for the “Stop” (OK button) do not work. Connecting a new Bluetooth headset You can only search for the new Bluetooth headset only in the D i s c o n n e c t e d condition. When you run the search, it will show you the list of all Bluetooth headsets responding. After new Bluetooth device is searched, the PIN number is validated to connect the device. For details, refer to the user manual of the applicable device. When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen, you cannot hear stereo sound through the Bluetooth headset. 1 MENU 4 Select B L U E T O O T H. OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 7 0 2 OK Select Bluetooth headset PIN number. Refer to the user manual of the applicable device for the PIN number. 5 OK Select B l u e t o o t h H e a d s e t. Connect the Bluetooth headset. TO USE THE BLUETOOTH *When selecting Cable (DVB cable mode) if Finland, Sweden or “--” country is chosen. 1. A Bluetooth headset is disconnected if there is any. 2. All headset device lists are deleted. 3. Bluetooth mode is turned off. 4. When trying to connect with a stereo-only headset, “Invalid format” will be displayed. 3 OK GREEN Search the Bluetooth headset. Connecting to Bluetooth headset already registered Bluetooth headsets are listed in the order most recently used with the headset currently in use listed at the top. When connecting to the Bluetooth device already registered, you can select and connect directly without any PIN validation. 1 MENU Select B L U E T O O T H. 2 OK Select B l u e t o o t h H e a d s e t. 4 OK Message asking to connect the selected Bluetooth headset will be displayed. Select Y e s or N o. 5 OK Connect the Bluetooth headset. 3 OK Select the desired Bluetooth headset. • After connecting/using the Bluetooth headset, the headset setting will be the D i s c o n n e c t e d condition automatically when you turn off the power of the TV and then turn on. • After connecting the Bluetooth headset, the TV speaker is switched to Mute condition and the sound will only be generated from the headset. 91 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH Disconnecting the Bluetooth headset during use 1 MENU 3 Select B L U E T O O T H. OK Disconnect the Bluetooth headset. 2 OK OK Select B l u e t o o t h H e a d s e t. When requesting to connect to TV from the Bluetooth headset TO USE THE BLUETOOTH 92 When the Bluetooth menu is "On" and there is a connection request from the headset, this message is dispalyed. Not all headsets support the this feature.(Refer to the user manual of the applicable Bluetooth headset.) Some headset types may make an attempt at connection when they are turned off/on even though they are not included in the Registered Device list. 1 OK Do you want to connect your headset? Yes No Select Y e s or N o. ! NOTE LG recommends the following headset models. -Mono/Stereo : Nokia : BH501 / Jabra : BT620s / Sony : DR-BT30Q / Philips : SHB7100 / Plantronics : Pulsar590 / Motorola : HT820 / Motorola : S9 / LG : HBS200 -Only Stereo : Logitech : Freepulse-wireless -Only Mono : Motorola : H800 / Jabra : BT250v / Jabra : BT2040 / Plantronics : Discovery665 / Nokia : BH-900 / Sony Ericsson : HBH-GV435 / Samsung : WEP500 / LG: Prada HBM-510 There might be an audio delay, depending on the buffer memory size of the headset. G The stereo/mono headset officially certified to be Bluetooth compatible can be searched and connected. G The stereo/mono headset that supports the A2DP or HSP function among the Bluetooth devices can be connected. G If the surrounding environment of the TV is as follows, the device may not be searched or connected properly. -If there is strong electromagnetic wave. -If there are many Bluetooth devices. -If the headset is turned off, not in place or has an error. -Because products such as microwave oven, wireless LAN, plasma light, gas range etc., use the same frequency range, it can cause communication error. G Only one Bluetooth headset can be connected at once. G Connection that is lost due to the TV being turned off etc. will not be automatically recovered. Try connecting the applicable device again. G Some operations can be slower while operating the headset. G Even if you choose simplink Home Theater after using the headset during Simplink operation, the unit will not automatically switch to Home Theater speakers. G When the headset connection continuously fails, pair the device one more time. G The audio quality of mono headsets will not be as good as that for stereo headsets. G Mono headsets may suffer from noise as the distance from the TV increases, because they use a different transmission method compared with stereo headsets. G When a Bluetooth headset is in use, the Volume +/- and Mute keys do not work, and the Audio menu returns to the default value and is disabled. G With Bluetooth set to On, if any registered devices are turned on, the TV will switch to Bluetooth mode automatically even though you are watching in another input mode. In this case, set Bluetooth to Off. G MANAGING REGISTERED BLUETOOTH DEVICE If there are no devices registered, Registered Bluetooth Device menu will be deactivated and cannot be used. When 12 devices are registered, you cannot register any more devices, and the external device will no longer be able to pair up with the TV. In this case, you should delete one (disconnect first if a device is connected to the TV) and then you can register another device. BLUETOOTH Move Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 OK Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Bluetooth Device Device Registered Bluetooth My Bluetooth Info. BLUETOOTH Move OK Bluetooth : Off Registered Bluetooth Device TV PIN : 0000 00:0d:44:84:14:62 Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Bluetooth Device Device Registered FreePulse_Wireless My Bluetooth Info. LG L600V Connect Select B L U E T O O T H. 2 OK 3 OK A Select R e g i s t e r e d B l u e t o o t h D e v i c e. Check the registered Bluetooth device. Connecting the registered Bluetooth headset 1 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH 1 MENU Delete Select the registered Bluetooth headset you want to connect. 2 BLUE Message asking to connect the selected Bluetooth headset will be displayed. 3 OK A Select Y e s or N o. Deleting registered Bluetooth device "Delete" will be available when selecting the device that is not connected to the TV. 1 Select the Bluetooth device you want to remove. 2 RED Message asking to delete the selected Bluetooth device will be displayed. 3 OK A Select Y e s or N o. Disconnecting registered Bluetooth device "Disconnect" will be available when selecting the device that is connected to the TV. 1 Select the Bluetooth device that is currently connected to the TV. 2 BLUE Disconnect the Bluetooth device. 93 TO USE THE BLUETOOTH MY BLUETOOTH INFORMATION This function provides the My Bluetooth Information to the user. "Edit" will be available when TV is not connected with any device. You can edit the My Device Name. You can check the My Device Address. BLUETOOTH Move OK BLUETOOTH Move Bluetooth : Off Bluetooth : Off TV PIN : 0000 TV PIN : 0000 OK Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Bluetooth Headset : Disconnected Registered Bluetooth Device Registered BluetoothMy Device Device Name My Bluetooth Info. My My Bluetooth Bluetooth Info. Info. 5 0 P S 7 0 0 0 - Z A TO USE THE BLUETOOTH My Device Address 0 0 : 0 5 : c 9 : f f : 0 0 f : 0 7 Edit 1 MENU Select B L U E T O O T H. 2 Select M y B l u e t o o t h I n f o .. OK 3 OK OK BLUE You can use an the alphabet A to Z , the number 0 to 9 , +/ -, and blank. 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 94 RECEIVING PHOTOS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE For details on how to send photos(only JPEG) from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user manual of the applicable device. Receiving file(s) F 1/3 G E Close • When you select C l o s e with the button, the OSD will disappear. And when you press the OK button again, it will appear again. ■ (Rotate) : Rotate photos. Rotates the photo 90° clockwise upon O K button on (Rotate). • The maximum accumulated size of the image(s) that can be received is 10MBytes. • You cannot receive the image(s) while using the Bluetooth headset. • You cannot receive the image(s) while listening to music from Bluetooth device. • When the external Bluetooth device is currently sending the photo, press the R E T U R N button to stop TO USE THE BLUETOOTH Select the desired photos. receiving the photo. All photos already received will be deleted as a result. • With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to transmit an image (JPEG) file to the TV set. LISTENING TO THE MUSICS FROM EXTERNAL BLUETOOTH DEVICE For details on how to listen to the musics from the external Bluetooth device to TV, refer to the user manual of the applicable device. You should use the Bluetooth device supporting A2DP(as external device) • With some Bluetooth devices, you may not be able to listen to music via the TV speaker system. Listening to bluetooth music Back to TV + or - button to adjust the volume. • Press the • If you wish to switch the sound off, press the MUTE button. • Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing. ! NOTE G G You cannot listen to music while using the Bluetooth headset. You cannot listen to music while receiving image(s). 95 TO USE A USB DEVICE G It is not possible to use USB function in 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 32/42/47LF51** models. When connecting a USB device When you connect a USB device, this pop up menu is displayed, automatically. “POP UP MENU” will not be displayed while the OSD including Menu, EPG or Schedule list is activated or while the Bluetooth Headset is connected. When the Pop Up menu does not appear, you can select Music List, Photo List or Movie List(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) in the USB menu. In USB device, you can not add a new folder or delete the existing folder. 1 Connect the USB device to the U S B I N jack on the TV. • Only photo(JPEG), music (MP3) and movie(DAT, MPG, MPEG, VOB, AVI, DIVX, MP4, MKV, TS, TRP, TP) (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) are supported. When removing the USB device USB memory stick Select P H O T O L I S T, M U S I C L I S T or M O V I E L I S T(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**). 2 TO USE A USB DEVICE 96 3 Select the USB Device menu before removing the USB device. 1Q. MENU Select Eject. 2 OK PHOTO LIST MUSIC LIST MOVIE LIST OK Precautions when using the USB device G Only a USB storage device is recognizable. G If the USB storage device is connected through a USB hub, the device is not recognizable. G A USB storage device using an automatic recognition programme may not be recognized. G A USB storage device which uses its own driver may not be recognized. G The recognition speed of a USB storage device may depend on each device. G Please do not turn off the TV or unplug the USB device when the connected USB storage device is working. When such device is suddenly separated or unplugged, the stored files or the USB storage device may be damaged. G Please do not connect the USB storage device which was artificially maneuvered on the PC. The device may cause the product to malfunction or fail to be played. Never forget to use only a USB storage device which has normal music files, image files or movie files. G Please use only a USB storage device which was formatted as a FAT32 file system, NTFS file system provided with the Windows operating system. In case of a storage device formatted as a different utility programme which is not supported by Windows, it may not be recognized. G Please connect power to a USB storage device(over 0.5 A) which requires an external power supply. If not, the device may not be recognized. G Please connect a USB storage device with the cable offered by the device maker. G Some USB storage devices may not be supported or operated smoothly. G File alignment method of USB storage device is similar to Window XP and filename can recognize up to 100 English characters. G Be sure to back up important files since data stored in a USB memory device may be damaged. We will not be responsible for any data loss. G If the USB HDD does not have an external power source, the USB device may not be detected. So be sure to connect the external power source. - Please use a power adaptor for an external power source. We do not guarantee an USB cable for an external power source. G Data in a USB storage device cannot be deleted in the NTFS file system. G If your USB memory device has multiple partitions, or if you use a USB multi-card reader, you can use up to 4 partitions or USB memory devices. G Only the FAT32 file system supports the delete function. G If a USB memory device is connected to a USB multi-card reader, its volume data may not be detected. G If the USB memory device does not work properly, disconnect and reconnect it. G How fast a USB memory device is detected differs from device to device. G If the USB is connected in Standby Mode, specific hard disk will automatically be loaded when the TV is turned on. G The recommended capacity is 1 TB or less for a USB external hard disk and 32 GB or less for USB memory. G Any device with more than the recommended capacity may not work properly. G If a USB external hard disk with a "Energy Saving" function does not work, turn the hard disk off and on again to make it work properly. G USB storage devices below USB 2.0 are supported as well. But they may not work properly in the movie list. ! NOTE ■ Image shown may differ from your TV. G In order to avoid losing the USB memory stick, use the USB connector(sold separately) to fix the USB memory stick to the USB connector holder of the TV. (Plasma TV only) USB connector holder USB Input Port USB Connector (sold separately) - Fix the one end of the USB connector to the USB memory stick and the other end to the USB connector holder. PHOTO LIST PHOTO(*.JPEG) supporting file Baseline : 64 x 64 to 15360 x 8640 Progressive : 64 x 64 to 1920 x 1440 • You can play JPEG files only. • Non-supported files are displayed in the form of predefined icon. TO USE A USB DEVICE You can view photo files on USB storage device. The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation. When you are watching the photo by the Photo List function, you can not change the picture mode. Screen Components 1 MENU 2 OK Select U S B. Select Photo List. OK 2 1 Moves to upper level folder 2 Current page/Total pages 3 Total number of marked photos 4 Photo List Page 2/3 Drive1 JMJ001 Corresponding buttons on the remote control Up Folder Navigation No Marked Up Folder 1366x768, 125KB 1 3 Popup Menu 4 KY103 09/10/2008 KY101 09/10/2008 KY104 09/10/2008 KY102 09/10/2008 KY105 09/10/2008 JMJ001 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 Page Change MARK Mark Exit 97 TO USE A USB DEVICE Photo Selection and PopUp Menu Photo List Page 2/3 Drive1 No Marked Up Folder KR103 09/10/2008 KR101 09/10/2008 KR104 09/10/2008 KR102 09/10/2008 KR105 09/10/2008 JMJ001 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 JMJ001 1366x768, 125KB Up Folder Navigation Popup Menu TO USE A USB DEVICE Photo List Page 2/3 Drive1 Page Change MARK KR101 Up Folder Navigation 1 Popup Menu Exit No Marked Up Folder JMJ001 1366x768, 125KB Mark 09/10/2008 KR103 09/10/2008 KR104 09/10/2008 1366x768, 125KB KR102 09/10/2008 KR105 09/10/2008 JMJ001 View 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 Mark All JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 Delete Close Page Change MARK Mark Exit G View : Display the selected item. Mark All : Mark all photos on the screen. Unmark All : Deselect all marked photos. G D e l e t e or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only) : Delete the selected photo item. G C l o s e : Close the pop-up menu. G G Select the target folder or drive. • Use the P 2 3 4 Select the desired photos. OK OK Show the PopUp menu. OK Select the desired PopUp menu. button to navigation in the photo page. • Use the M A R K button to mark or unmark a photo. When one or more photos are marked, you can view each marked photo or a slide show of the marked photos. If no photos are marked, you can view every individual photo in the folder or a slide show of all photos in the folder. • Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing. 98 How to view photo Detailed operations are available on full-sized photo view screen. Photo List Page 2/3 Drive1 No Marked Up Folder KR103 09/10/2008 KR101 09/10/2008 KR104 09/10/2008 KR102 09/10/2008 KR105 09/10/2008 JMJ001 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 JMJ001 1366x768, 125KB Up Folder Navigation Popup Menu Page 2/3 Drive1 MARK JMJ001 KR101 Up Folder Navigation 1 Popup Menu Exit No Marked Up Folder 1366x768, 125KB Mark 09/10/2008 KR103 09/10/2008 KR104 09/10/2008 1366x768, 125KB KR102 09/10/2008 KR105 09/10/2008 JMJ001 View 09/10/2008 JMJ005 09/10/2008 JMJ002 09/10/2008 JMJ006 09/10/2008 JMJ003 09/10/2008 JMJ007 09/10/2008 JMJ004 09/10/2008 JMJ008 09/10/2008 Mark All Delete Close Page Change MARK Mark Select the target folder or drive. Exit 1/17 Slideshow BGM Delete Option Hide The aspect ratio of a photo may change the size of the photo displayed on the screen in full size. Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. • Use the P TO USE A USB DEVICE Photo List Page Change button to navigation in the photo page. 2 3 OK OK 4 5 Select the desired photos. Show the PopUp menu. Select V i e w. OK The selected photo is displayed in full size. 99 TO USE A USB DEVICE 6 OK Select the Slideshow , B G M, D e l e t e , Option or H i d e. • Use (Rotate), button to select the previous or next photo. 1/17 Slideshow BGM Delete Option Hide • Use button to select and control the menu on the full-sized screen. TO USE A USB DEVICE G S l i d e s h o w : When no picture is selected, all photos in the current folder are displayed during slide show. If some photos are selected, those photos are displayed in a slide show. ■ Set the time interval of the slide show in O p t i o n. G B G M (Background Music) : Listen to music while viewing photos in full size. ■ Set the Music Folder for BGM in Options before using this function. G ( R o t a t e ) : Rotate photos. Rotates the photo 90°, 180°, 270°, 360° clockwise. ■ It can not be rotate when the width of a picture is bigger than supported height. ■ G D e l e t e (FAT32 file system only) : Delete photos. G O p t i o n : Set values for S l i d e S p e e d and M u s i c F o l d e r for B G M. ■ Use button and O K button to set values. Then go to OK and press O K to save the settings. ■ You cannot change M u s i c F o l d e r while BGM is playing. Press F G to set the time interval between slides. Slide Speed Fast Music Folder Music OK G 100 H i d e : Hide the menu on the full-sized screen. ■ To see the menu again on the full-sized screen, press O K button to display. Cancel MUSIC LIST You can play music files on USB storage device. Purchased music files(*.MP3) may contain copyright restrictions. Playback of these files may not be supported by this model. Music file on your USB device can be played by this unit. The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation. MUSIC (*.MP3) supporting file Bit rate 32 to 320 • Sampling rate MPEG1 Layer3 : 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz • Sampling rate MPEG2 Layer3 : 16 kHz, 22.05 kHz, 24 kHz • Sampling rate MPEG2.5 Layer3 : 8 kHz, 11.025 kHz, 12 kHz TO USE A USB DEVICE Screen Components 1 MENU 2 OK Select U S B. Select Music List. OK 3 1 2 Preview: If any album jacket for the file(Album Art Image) exists, this jacket is displayed. Moves to upper level folder 3 Current page/Total pages 4 Total number of marked music title 5 Music List 1 Page 2/3 No Marked Music Title S003 Duration Up Folder S001 S002 00:00/01:34 Corresponding buttons on the remote control 4 2 Up Folder Navigation Popup Menu S003 01:34 S004 03:23 S005 04:28 Page Change MARK Mark Exit 5 101 TO USE A USB DEVICE Music Selection and PopUp Menu As shown, up to 6 music titles are listed per page. Music List Music S003 Duration Title Up Folder S001 S002 00:00/01:34 TO USE A USB DEVICE Music S003 3 4 03:23 04:28 Page Change MARK Mark Exit No Marked Page 2/3 Title 4395KB 1Kbps Up Folder Play S001 Play with Photo S002 Mark All S003 Delete 00:00/01:34 S004 Close Up Folder S005 Navigation 2 01:34 Popup Menu Music List 1 S003 S004 S005 Up Folder Navigation Popup Menu 04:28 Page Change MARK Mark Select the target folder or drive. Select the desired music title OK OK Show the PopUp menu. OK P l a y (During stop) : Play the selected music titles. One playback of a piece of music finishes, the next selected one will be played. When there are no selected music titles to play, the next one in the current folder will be played. If you go to a different folder and press the O K button, the current music in playback will stop. G P l a y M a r k e d : Play the selected music titles. Once a music finishes playing, the next selected one will be played automatically. G S t o p P l a y (During playback) : Stop the playing music titles. G P l a y w i t h P h o t o : Start playing the selected music titles and then move to the Photo List. G M a r k A l l : Mark all music titles in the folder. G U n m a r k A l l : Deselect all marked music titles. G D e l e t e or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only) : Delete the selected music titles. G C l o s e : Close the pop-up menu. G No Marked Page 2/3 Exit • Use the P button to navigate up/down in the music page. • Use M A R K button to mark or unmark a music. When one or more music files are marked, the marked music title will be played in sequence. For example, if you want to listen to only one music repeatedly, just mark the music only and play it. If no music is marked, all the music in the folder will be played in sequence. Select the desired PopUp menu. • Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing. 102 ■ If you don't press any button for a while during the playing, the play information box (as shown in the below) will float as a screen saver. ■ The ‘Screen Saver’? Screen saver is to prevent screen pixel damage due to an fixed image remaining on the screen for a extended period of time. ! NOTE TO USE A USB DEVICE When a music file is played, is displayed behind the title. G A damaged or corrupted music does not play but displays 00:00 in playtime. G A music downloaded from a paid service with copyright protection does not start but displays inappropriate information in playtime. G If you press O K, A buttons, screen saver is stopped. G The P L A Y ( G) , P a u s e ( I I ) , A, GG, FF buttons on the remote control are also available in this mode. G You can use the GG button to select the next music and the FF button to select the previous music. G 103 TO USE A USB DEVICE MOVIE LIST(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) You can play movie files on a USB storage device. The movie list is activated once USB is detected. It is used when playing movie files on TV. Displays the movies in the USB folder and supports Play. Allows playback of all movies in the folder and user desired files. It is a movie list that displays folder information and movie file. The On Screen Display may be different from your TV. Images are an example to assist with the TV operation. TO USE A USB DEVICE Movie(*.dat/*.mpg/*.mpeg/*.ts/*.trp/*.tp/*.vob/*.mp4/*.mkv/*.avi/*.divx) supporting file Video format :DivX3.11, DivX4.12, DivX5.x, DivX6, Xvid1.00, Xvid1.01, Xvid1.02, Xvid1.03, Xvid 1.10beta-1/beta-2, Mpeg-1, Mpeg-2, Mpeg-4, H.264/AVC Audio format : Dolby Digital, AAC, Mpeg, MP3, LPCM, HEAAC Bit rate : within 32 kbps to 320 kbps (MP3) Subtitle format : *.smi/*.srt/*.sub(MicroDVD, SubViewer1.0/2.0)/*.ass/*.ssa/*.txt(TMPlayer)/*.psb(PowerDivx) • Some user-created subtitles may not work properly. • Some special characters are not supported in subtitles. • HTML tags are not supported in subtitles. • Subtitles in languages other than the supported languages are not available. • Time information in an external subtitle file should be arranged in ascending order to be played. • The screen may suffer temporary interruptions (image stoppage, faster playback, etc.) when the audio language is changed. • A damaged movie file may not be played correctly, or some player functions may not be usable. • Movie files produced with some encoders may not be played correctly. • If the video and audio structure of recorded file is not interleaved, either video or audio is outputted. • HD videos with a maximum of 1920x1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P are supported, depending on the frame. • Videos with resolutions higher than 1920X1080@25/30P or 1280x720@50/60P may not work properly depending on the frame. • Movie files other than the specified types and formats may not work properly. • Max bitrate of playable movie file is 20 Mbps. • We do not guarantee smooth playback of profiles encoded level 4.1 or higher in H.264/AVC. • DTS Audio codec is not supported. • A movie file more than 30GB in file size is not supported for playback. • A DivX movie file and its subtitle file must be located in the same folder. • A video file name and its subtitle file name must be identical for it to be displayed. • Playing a video via a USB connection that doesn’t support high speed may not work properly.. • Files encoded with GMC(Global Motion Compensation) may not be played. • When you are watching the movie by Movie List function, you can adjust an image by E n e r g y S a v i n g and A V M o d e key on the remote control. User setup for each image mode does not operate. File Extension name mpg, mpeg, vob dat Video Decoder Audio Codec MPEG1, MPEG2 Dolby Digital,MPEG,MP3,LPCM MPEG1 Dolby Digital,MPEG,MP3,LPCM ts,trp,tp MPEG2, H.264/AVC Dolby Digital,AAC,MPEG mp4 MPEG4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Dvix 4.12, Dvix 5.x Dolby Digital,HEAAC, AAC,MPEG,MP3,LPCM Dvix 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03 Max Resolution Xvid 1.10–beta 1, Xvid 1.10-beta 2, H.264/AVC avi MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Divx 4, Divx 5, Divx 6 Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10–beta 1 Dolby Digital,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG, MP3,LPCM Xvid 1.10–beta 2, H.264/AVC mkv divx H.264/AVC, MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP , MPEG4 ASP MPEG 2, MPEG 4 SP, MPEG4 ASP, Divx 3.11, Divx 4, Divx 5, Divx 6 Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10–beta 1 Xvid 1.10–beta 2, H.264/AVC 104 Dolby Digital,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG,MP3,LPCM Dolby Digital,HEAAC,AAC,MPEG, MP3,LPCM 1920x1080@30p Screen Components 1 MENU 2 Select U S B. OK Select Movie List. OK 2 1 Moves to upper level folder 2 Current page/Total pages 3 Total number of marked movie title 4 Movie List 3 Page 2/3 movie M003 No Marked Title Duration Up Folder Corresponding buttons on the remote control M001 M002 M003 640x480, 720KB Up Folder Navigation M005 Popup Menu 4 Page Change MARK Mark Exit TO USE A USB DEVICE 1 M004 105 TO USE A USB DEVICE Movie Selection and PopUp Menu Movie List No Marked Page 2/3 movie M003 Duration Title Up Folder M001 M002 M003 1:340, 120KB M004 M005 Up Folder Navigation Popup Menu Movie List movie M003 Page Change MARK Mark No Marked Page 2/3 1366x768, 125KB Play M002 Mark All M003 TO USE A USB DEVICE 1:340, 120KB Up Folder 1 2 Delete M004 Popup Menu Close M005 Page Change MARK Mark Select the target folder or drive. Select the desired movie title OK 3 OK Play : Play the selected movie. Divx Play is executed while screen changes. G M a r k A l l : Mark all Movie in the folder. G U n m a r k A l l : Deselect all marked movies. G D e l e t e or Delete Marked(FAT32 file system only) : Delete the selected Movie item. G C l o s e : Close the pop-up menu. G Duration Title Up Folder M001 Navigation Exit Exit • Use the P button to navigation in the movie page. • Use M A R K button to mark or unmark a movie. When one or more movie files are marked, the marked movies will be played in sequence. Show the PopUp menu. 4 OK Select the desired PopUp menu. • Press the R E T U R N button to return to normal TV viewing. ! NOTE G 106 In the case of files not supported, a message regarding non-supported file is displayed. Using the Movie List function, play Picture Size F Full G 1 Audio Language Subtitle Language Latin 1 . Sync 0 . Position 0 Close P i c t u r e S i z e : Selects your desired picture format during movie play. G Audio Language & Subtitle Language : Changes the Language Group of the audio/subtitle during movie play. G S y n c : Adjusts the time synchronisation of the subtitle from -10 secs to +10 secs by steps of 0.5 secs during movie play. G P o s i t i o n : Changes the position of the subtitle either up or down during movie play. G Option Support Language Latin1 English, Spanish, French, German, Italian, Swedish, Finnish, Dutch, Portuguese, Danish, Romanian, Norwegian, Albanian, Gaelic, Welsh, Irish, Catalan,Valencian Latin2 Bosnian, Polish, Croatian, Czech, Slovak, Slovenian, Serbian, Hungarian Latin4 Estonian, Latvian, Lithuanian Cyrillic Bulgarian, Macedonian, Russian, Ukrainian, Kazakh Greek Greek Turkish Turkish ! NOTE Only the files saved in ASCII CODE is supported for the external subtitles of the movie. G Only 500 alphabets and 500 numbers are supported for each line of the subtitle. G Only 10,000 of sync blocks can be supported within the subtitle file. G Using the remote control TO USE A USB DEVICE Subtitle Language When playing, FF / GG repeatedly, press the R E W( FF) button to speed up FF(x2) -> FFF(x4) -> FFFF(x8) -> FFFFF(x16) ->FFFFFF(x32) . repeatedly, press the F F( GG) button to speed up GG(x2)-> GGG(x4) -> GGGG(x8) -> GGGGG(x16) -> GGGGGG(x32). ■ II During playback, press the P a u s e ( I I) button. ■ Still screen is displayed. ■If no buttons are pressed on the remote control for 10 minutes after pausing, the TV returns to the playback state. ■ Press the P a u s e ( I I ) button and then use the F F ( GG ) button for slow motion. ■ P L A Y ( G) Pressing these buttons repeatedly increases the fast forward/reverse speed. When using the or button during playback a cursor indicating the position can be viewed on the screen. Press the P L A Y( G) button to return to normal playback. Press the E N E R G Y S A V I N G button repeatedly to increase the brightness of your screen.(Refer to p. 116) AV MODE Press the A V M O D E button repeatedly to select the desired source.(Refer to p. 86) 107 TO USE A USB DEVICE DIVX REGISTRATION CODE (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) Confirm the DivX registration code number of the TV. Using the registration number, movies can be rented or purchased at www.divx.com/vod. With a DivX registration code from other TV, playback of rented or purchased DivX file is not allowed. (Only DivX files matched with the registration code of the purchased TV are playable.) USB Move OK USB Photo List Photo List Music List Music List Movie List Movie List DivX DivXReg. Reg.Code Code DivX DivX Reg. Reg. Code Code Deactivation Deactivation Move i OK DivX(R) Video On Demand Your registration Code is: xxxxxxxxxx To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod. Close TO USE A USB DEVICE 1 MENU Select U S B. 2 Select D i v X R e g . C o d e. OK 3 OK Display D i v X R e g . C o d e. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content. To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu. Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. “DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content” “Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688;7,519,274” ! NOTE Movie files are supported as follows Resolution : under 1920x1080 WxH pixels Frame rate : under 30 frames/sec(1920x1080), under 60 frames/sec(under 1280x720) G Video Codec : MPEG 1, MPEG 2, MPEG 4, H.264/AVC, DivX 3.11, DivX 4.12, DivX 5.x, DivX 6, Xvid 1.00, Xvid 1.01, Xvid 1.02, Xvid 1.03, Xvid 1.10-beta1, Xvid 1.10-beta2 G 108 DEACTIVATION (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) The purpose of deactivation is to allow deactivation of devices for users who have activated all the available devices through the web_server and are blocked from activating more devices. DivX VOD allowed the consumer to activate up to 6 devices under one account, but to replace or deactivate any of those devices, the consumer had to contact DivX Support and request deletion. Now with this added feature, consumers will be able to deactivate the device themselves and hence better manage their DivX VOD devices. USB Move OK USB Photo List Photo List Music List Music List Movie List Movie List DivX Reg. Code DivX Reg. Code Deactivation Deactivation Move i OK DivX(R) Video On Demand Do you want to deactivate your device? Yes 2 Select U S B. OK Select D e a c t i v a t i o n. OK Select Y e s. 3 4 OK Close TO USE A USB DEVICE 1 MENU No i DivX(R) Video On Demand This device is deactivated. Your deactivation code is: xxxxxxxx To learn more visit www.divx.com/vod. Display D e a c t i v a t i o n. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 109 EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) This system has an Electronic Programme Guide (EPG) to help your navigation through all the possible viewing options. The EPG supplies information such as programme listings, start and end times for all available services. In addition, detailed information about the programme is often available in the EPG (the availability and amount of these programme details will vary, depending on the particular broadcaster). This function can be used only when the EPG information is broadcast by broadcasting companies The EPG displays the programme details for next 8 days. Shows the present screen information. Displayed with a Teletext Programme. Displayed with a DTV Programme. Displayed with a Subtitle Programme. Displayed with a Radio Programme. Displayed with a Scramble Programme. Displayed with a MHEG Programme. Displayed with a Dolby Programme. Displayed with a AAC Programme. Displayed with a Dolby Digital PLUS Programme. DTV Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme. Aspect ratio of broadcasting programme. 576i/p, 720p, 1080i/p : Resolution of broadcasting programme Switch on/off EPG 1GUIDE 1 or P Select desired programme. 2 OK The EPG will disappear after moving to a selected program. Button Function in NOW/NEXT Guide Mode You can view a program being broadcasted and one scheduled to follow. RED Change EPG mode. Programme Guide 1 YLE TV1 DTV YELLO YELLOW Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode. DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV BLUE Enter Timer Record/Remind list mode. ALL DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV NOW 1 YLE TV1 Your World Today 4 TV.. Legenen om Den.... Naturtimmen Lyssna Glamour 8 YLE24 DTV DTV FAV Favourite The EPG will disappear after moving to a selected program. Mode Select NOW or NEXT Programme. GUIDE Select the Broadcast Programme. TV/RAD Page Up/Down. Keno World Business Fantomen Kritiskt ABC Tänään otsikoissa E DTV OK NEXT That ’70s show 2 YLE TV2 5 YLE FST 6 CNN 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 E EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) Select a programme P 110 Switch on or off EPG. INFO i Information Pr. Change TV/RAD RADIO Schedule or Switch off EPG. Select TV or RADIO Programme. Detail information on or off Schedule List Button Function in 8 Day Guide Mode Programme Guide 1 YLE TV1 DTV ALL DTV DTV DTV GREEN Enter Date setting mode. 15:00 Kungskonsumente Antigues Roadshow Mint Extra TV2: Farmen The Drum The Drum You Call The Hits Fashion Essentials ... ... ... Tänään otsikoissa 4 TV.. DTV DTV DTV 5 YLE FST 6 CNN DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV 8 YLE24 DTV DTV mode. 14:00 2 YLE TV2 DTV DTV YELLO YELLOW Enter Timer Record/Remind setting 6 Apr. (Fri.) 1 YLE TV1 DTV 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 E RED Change EPG mode. ... E FAVDTV Favourite INFO i Information Pr. Change Date Mode TV/RAD RADIO Schedule Schedule List BLUE Enter Timer Record/Remind list mode. Page Up/Down. P OK The EPG will disappear after moving to a selected program. GUIDE Switch off EPG. or Select Programme. TV/RAD Select TV or RADIO Programme. Select the Broadcast Programme. Button Function in Date Change Mode Programme Guide 1 YLE TV1 ALL E DTV 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 6 Apr. (Fri.) 14:00 E DTV E GREEN Switch off Date setting mode. 15:00 E OK Change to the selected date. DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV Select a date. DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV DTV Switch off Date setting mode. GUIDE or Switch off EPG. 1 YLE TV1 2 YLE TV2 4 TV.. 5 YLE FST 6 CNN 8 YLE24 ... Kungskonsumente Antigues Roadshow Mint Extra TV2: Farmen The Drum The Drum You Call The Hits Fashion Essentials ... ... ... Tänään otsikoissa E Date. Change Date Exit EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) Detail information on or off 111 EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) Button Function in Extended Description Box DTV Information Text Up/Down. DTV 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 DTV 6 Apr. 2007 YELLO YELLOW Enter Timer Record/Remind setting mode. The detail information on or off. or GUIDE E Switch off EPG. INFO i Info. Exit Schedule Button Function in Record/Remind Setting Mode Sets a start or end time for recording, and sets only a start time for the reminder with the end time grayed out. This function is available only when recording equipment that use pin8 recording signalling has been connected to the DTV-OUT(AV2) terminal, using a SCART cable. Change to Guide or Schedule mode. Select the date to record. Date 6 Mar. End Time Programme 15:09 17 : 30 That ’70s sh E Prev. OK Select Date, Start/End time or Programme. OK Save Timer Record/Remind. Button Function in Schedule List Mode If you’ve created a schedule list, a scheduled program is displayed at the scheduled time even when you are watching a different program at the time. Only the Up/Down/OK/Return keys will work when a popup window is open. Schedule List RED Add new Manual Recording setting mode. Page1/1 Start Date Fri. 6 Apr. 2007 15:09 Start Time Title 6 May 16:00 Friend1 6 May 18:00 Friend2 BLUE or GUIDE Friend2 16:00 Modify Delete GREEN Add new Timer Watching setting mode. Delete All Remind DTV 19 Dave (Fri.)06/05/2007 16:00 Change to Guide mode. D E Close Modify/Delete Move New Record P Page Change New Remind Switch off EPG. OK Select S c h e d u l e L i s t. Select your desired Option(Modify/Delete/Delete All). P 112 Start Time E EPG (ELECTRONIC PROGRAMME GUIDE)(IN DIGITAL MODE) Select Record or Remain. Function setting. Page Up/Down. Exit Programme Guide PICTURE CONTROL PICTURE SIZE (ASPECT RATIO) CONTROL You can watch the screen in various picture formats; 16:9, Just Scan, Original, Full Wide, 4:3, 14:9, Zoom and Cinema Zoom. If a fixed image is displayed on the screen for a long time, that fixed image may become imprinted on the screen and remain visible. You can adjust the enlarge proportion using button. This function works in the following signal. 1Q. MENU Select A s p e c t R a t i o. 2 • You can also adjust Aspect Ratio in the P I C- T U R E menu. • For Zoom Setting, select 1 4 : 9, Z o o m and Select the desired picture format. • Original When your TV receives a wide screen signal it will automatically change to the picture format broadcast. Original • Just Scan Following Selection will lead to you view the picture of best quality without loss of original picture in high resolution image. Note : If there is noise in original Picture, You can see the noise at the edge. Just Scan PICTURE CONTROL • 16:9 The following selection will allow you to adjust the picture horizontally, in linear proportion, to fill the entire screen(useful for viewing 4:3 formatted DVDs). C i n e m a Z o o m in Ratio Menu. After completing Zoom Setting, the display goes back to Q.Menu. • Full Wide When TV receives the wide screen signal,it will lead you to adjust the picture horizontally or vertically, in a linear proportion,to fill the entire screen fully. Full Wide 113 PICTURE CONTROL • 4:3 The following selection will allow you to view a picture with an original 4:3 aspect ratio, gray bars will appear on both the left and right of the screen. • Zoom The following selection will allow you to view the picture without any alteration, while filling the entire screen. However, the top and bottom of the picture will be cropped. • 14:9 You can view a picture format of 14:9 or a general TV programme in the 14:9 mode. The 14:9 screen is viewed in the same way as in 4:3, but is magnified to the left and right. • Cinema Zoom Choose Cinema Zoom when you want to enlarge the picture in correct proportion. Note:When enlarging or reducing the picture, the image may become distorted. PICTURE CONTROL F or G button: Adjust enlarge proportion of Cinema Zoom. The adjustment range is 1 to 16. E or D button: Move the screen. ! NOTE G G G G G 114 You can only select 4 : 3, 1 6 : 9 (Wide), 1 4 : 9, Z o o m / C i n e m a Z o o m in Component mode. You can only select 4 : 3, Original, 1 6 : 9 (Wide), 1 4 : 9, Z o o m / C i n e m a Z o o m in HDMI mode. You can only select 4 : 3, 1 6 : 9 (Wide) in RGB-PC, HDMI-PC mode only. In DTV/HDMI/Component (over 720p) mode, J u s t S c a n is available. In Analogue/AV mode, Full Wide is available. PICTURE WIZARD This feature lets you adjust the picture quality of the original image. Use this to calibrate the screen quality by adjusting the Black and White Level etc. General users can calibrate the screen quality by easily following each stage. When you adjust the image to Low, Recommended or High, you can see the changed result as an example. In RGB-PC/HDMI-PC/DVI-PC mode, the changed Colour, Tint and H/V Sharpness values are not applied. Picture Wizard PICTURE Move Aspect Ratio OK With Picture Wizard, you can adjust the picture quality of the original image. : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving Picture Mode : Off : Standard • Backlight 70 • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 Previous E Select P I C T U R E. 2 OK 3 OK 4 OK OK Select P i c t u r e W i z a r d. • If you stop the setting before the final stage, the changes will not be applied • The adjustment value is saved to Expert1. • Once the Picture Wizard sets the image quality, the Energy Saving is changed into Off. (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only) Adjust B l a c k l e v e l , W h i t e l e v e l , C o l o u r , T i n t , H S h a r p n e s s , V S h a r p n e s s , C o l o u r T e m p e r a t u r e(Only 42/47LH90**), D y n a m i c C o n t r a s t(Only 42/47LH90**), C o l o u r G a i n(Only 42/47LH90**), B a c k l i g h t (LCD TV/LED LCD TV only). MARK FAV PICTURE CONTROL 1 MENU Next Select input source to apply the settings. 5 OK • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 115 PICTURE CONTROL ENERGY SAVING It reduces the TV’s power consumption. The default factory setting complies with the E n e r g y S t a r requirements and is adjusted to the comfortable level to be viewed at home. You can increase the brightness of your screen by adjusting the E n e r g y S a v i n g l e v e l or by setting the P i c t u r e M o d e. When adjusting Energy Saving in MHEG mode, the Energy Saving setting is applied after MHEG is finished. S c r e e n O f f’ while tuned to a radio station channel will reduce power consumption. (LCD TV/LED LCD Selecting ‘S TV only) L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y PICTURE Aspect Ratio Move Plasma TV only PICTURE OK : 16:9 Aspect Ratio Picture Wizard Auto EnergySaving Saving : :Intelligent IntelligentSensor Sensor Energy Intelligent Sensor Off : Standard Off • Backlight Minimum 70 Picture Mode : Vivid • Contrast 100Minimum • Brightness 50 Medium • Sharpness 70 Maximum • Sharpness Screen 70 Off • Colour 70 Select P I C T U R E. PICTURE CONTROL 2 F Low G Off • Contrast Medium 90 • BrightnessMaximum 50 E 1 MENU OK Picture Wizard EnergySaving Saving : :Off Off Energy Picture Mode Move : 16:9 E 1 MENU Select P I C T U R E. 2 OK 3 OK Select OK E n e r g y S a v i n g. Select A u t o(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***),, O f f , M i n i m u m , M e d i u m , M a x i m u m or S c r e e n O f f. 3 OK Select E n e r g y S a v i n g. Select I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r , O f f , M i n i m u m , M e d i u m or M a x i m u m. • Intelligent Sensor Select L o w, M i d d l e or H i g h . • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. • When selecting Screen off, TV turned off after 3 seconds. • If you adjust “EE n e r g y S a v i n g - A u t o (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 116 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***), M i n i m u m, M e d i u m, M a x i m u m”, B a c k l i g h t feature will not work.(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only). • You can also adjust this feature by selecting E n e r g y S a v i n g button on the remote control. • When selecting Auto, Backlight is automatically adjusted through intelligent sensor according to the surrounding condition when intelligent sensor is in the TV. PRESET PICTURE SETTINGS Picture Mode-Preset Strengthen the contrast, brightness, colour and sharpness for vivid picture. The most general screen display status. The most natural screen display status. Optimizes video for watching movies. Optimizes video for watching sports events. Optimizes video for playing games. Vivid Standard Natural Cinema Sport Game Plasma TV only L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y PICTURE Aspect Ratio Move : 16:9 Picture Wizard Energy Saving Picture PictureMode Mode PICTURE OK Intelligent Sensor Move : 16:9 Picture Wizard Vivid Vivid : IntelligentStandard Sensor Vivid Vivid : :Vivid Vivid Cinema Energy Saving : Off Vivid : :Standard StandardStandard Standard Picture PictureMode Mode • BacklightNatural 80 • ContrastCinema 90 • Brightness 50 Sport • Sharpness 60 Game E OK Aspect Ratio Cinema • Contrast 100 Sport • Brightness 50 Game • Sharpness 70 Expert1 • Colour 70 Expert2 E Standard Sport Game Expert1 Expert2 Expert1 ( Only 50/60PS80**) Expert2 MENU 2 OK 3 OK Select P I C T U R E. Select P i c t u r e M o d e. Select I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***), V i v i d, S t a n d a r d, N a t u r a l, C i n e m a, S p o r t or G a m e. 1 MENU 2 OK 3 OK Select P I C T U R E. Select P i c t u r e M o d e. Select V i v i d, S t a n d a r d, C i n e m a ( o r C i n e m a ), S p o r t or G a m e. PICTURE CONTROL 1 ( Except for 50/60PS80**) • P i c t u r e M o d e adjusts the TV for the best picture appearance. Select the preset value in the P i c t u r e M o d e menu based on the programme category. • When the Intelligent sensor function is on, the most suitable picture is automatically adjusted according to the surrounding conditions. (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***) • You can also adjust P i c t u r e M o d e in the Q . M e n u. • I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r Adjusts picture according to the surrounding conditions. (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***) • C i n e m a (Only 50/60PS80**) :This is cinema quality mode to provide you the experience of watching a movie at home.The user will be able enjoy the best level of satisfactory screen quality in any movie without any separate adjustments.Cinema expresses the optimal screen quality when it is darkest. C i n e m a, Aspect ratio changes to Just scan. When selecting • C i n e m a(Thomlinson Holman ’s Experiment)is the audio and video certification standard of THX established by George Lucas,who directed the movie Star Wars,and Thomlinson. This is the product to be certified in THX display area and guarantees screen quality that exceeds the display standard specification in both hardware and software. 117 PICTURE CONTROL MANUAL PICTURE ADJUSTMENT Picture Mode-User option B a c k l i g h t (LCD TV/LED LCD TV Only) To control the brightness of the screen, adjust the brightness of LCD panel. Adjusting the backlight when setting the brightness of the set is recommended. Contrast Adjusts the signal level between black and white in the picture. You may use Contrast when the bright part of the picture is saturated. Brightness Adjusts the base level of the signal in the picture. Sharpness Adjusts the level of crispness in the edges between the light and dark areas of the picture. The lower the level, the softer the image. Colour Adjusts intensity of all colours. Tint Adjusts the balance between red and green levels. It is not available to use this function in “II n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r”(except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***). PICTURE Aspect Ratio Move PICTURE OK : 16:9 Aspect Ratio Picture Wizard Energy Saving PictureMode Mode Picture Energy Saving Standard : :Standard Picture PictureMode Mode PICTURE CONTROL • Contrast 90 • Contrast 50 • Sharpness 70 Select P i c t u r e M o d e. Select V i v i d, S t a n d a r d, N a t u r a l, C i n e m a(or C i n e m a), S p o r t or G a m e. OK 4 Natural • Benefits of using Backlight (LCD TV/LED LCD TV Only) - The electricity consumption is reduced by up to 60%. - The black brightness is reduced. (As the black has greater depth, you can enjoy a better quality definition.) - You can adjust brightness with maintaining original signal resolution. OK Select B a c k l i g h t(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), C o n t r a s t, B r i g h t n e s s, S h a r p n e s s, C o l o u r or T i n t. OK Make appropriate adjustments. 5 Standard Standard Cinema 80 Sport 90 Game • Brightness 50 Expert1 • Sharpness 60 E Expert2 • Backlight Select P I C T U R E. 3 : :Standard Standard 70 1 MENU OK : Off • Backlight • Brightness OK Intelligent Sensor Vivid Picture Wizard : Off E 2 Move : 16:9 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. ! NOTE G G 118 You cannot adjust colour, sharpness and tint in the RGB-PC/HDMI-PC mode. When the E x p e r t 1 / 2 is selected, you can select B a c k l i g h t(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), C o n t r a s t, B r i g h t n e s s, H S h a r p n e s s , V S h a r p n e s s, C o l o u r or T i n t . PICTURE IMPROVEMENT TECHNOLOGY You can calibrate the screen for each Picture Mode or set the video value according to the special video screen. You can set the video value differently for each input. To reset to the factory default screen after making adjustments to each video mode, execute the “Picture Reset” function for each Picture Mode. Image shown may differ from your TV. PICTURE Move PICTURE OK Colour Temperature F 90 Medium Low 50 60 Medium E • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 Dynamic Contrast • Contrast Dynamic Colour • Brightness • Sharpness 70 Noise Reduction • Sharpness R • Colour 60 Gamma • Colour R G G Medium Move OK AdvancedControl Control ••Advanced • Picture Reset • Picture Reset Real Cinema 0 R G Screen Screen Colour Temperature TruMotion E 100Hz Medium Low Noise Reduction Medium Off Gamma Medium On Black Level Low Film Mode Auto G Close L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y G Medium Dynamic Colour R E Auto On E Close Plasma TV only Select P I C T U R E. 2 OK 3 OK 4 Select A d v a n c e d C o n t r o l. Select your desired Source.: C o l o u r T e m p e r a t u r e, D y n a m i c C o n t r a s t, D y n a m i c C o l o u r, N o i s e R e d u c t i o n , G a m m a , B l a c k L e v e l, E y e C a r e(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), R e a l C i n e m a(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), F i l m M o d e(Plasma TV only), T r u M o t i o n 1 0 0 H z or T r u M o t i o n 2 0 0 H z(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only), C o l o u r G a m u t, E d g e E n h a n c e r, x v Y C C or O P C(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)). ( R e f e r t o p . 1 2 1 t o 1 2 2 ) Make appropriate adjustments. PICTURE CONTROL 1 MENU F Dynamic Contrast 60 Medium • Tint 0 Black Level • Advanced Control • Advanced Control Eye Care • Tint G • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 119 PICTURE CONTROL EXPERT PICTURE CONTROL By segmenting categories, E x p e r t 1 and E x p e r t 2 provide more categories which users can set as they see fit, offering the optimal picture quality for users. This may also be used to help a professional optimize the TV performance using specific videos. Image shown may differ from your TV. PICTURE Move Aspect Ratio : 16:9 PICTURE Energy Saving : Off Standard Natural Expert1 : :Standard Cinema • Backlight 80 Sport • Contrast 90 Game • Brightness 50 Expert1 Expert1 • Sharpness 60 E Expert2 Dynamic Contrast Noise Reduction • Contrast Gamma R • Brightness R Black Level • Sharpness Real Cinema • Colour Vivid Picture Wizard PictureMode Mode Picture OK Intelligent Sensor F Move 90 G G • Tint 100Hz TruMotion Screen 50 Off G OK R R Auto Black Level 60 On Film Mode 0 ••Expert Expert Control Colour Standard • Picture Reset Colour Gamut E Edge Enhancer R Low Off F G G G Medium Auto On Colour Standard SD SD Colour Gamut Standard Standard Edge Enhancer High High Close L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y G Off Gamma Medium 60 E PICTURE CONTROL 1 MENU Dynamic Contrast Noise Reduction Off xvYCC Auto E Close Plasma TV only Select P I C T U R E. 2 OK Select P i c t u r e M o d e. 3 OK Select OK Select E x p e r t C o n t r o l. OK Select your desired Source. E x p e r t 1 or E x p e r t 2. 4 5 6 Make appropriate adjustments. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 120 *This feature is not available for all models. Colour Temperature [Advanced Control] (Warm/Medium/Cool) ■ Choose one of three automatic colour adjustments. Set to warm to enhance hotter colours such as red, or set to cool to make picture bluish. ■ Adjusts the contrast to keep it at the best level according to the brightness of the screen. The picture is improved by making bright parts brighter and dark parts darker. ■ Adjusts screen colours so that they look livelier, richer and clearer. This feature enhances hue, saturation and luminance so that red, blue, green and white look more vivid. Noise Reduction (Off/Low/Medium/High) ■ Reduces screen noise without compromising video quality. Gamma (Low/Medium/High) ■ You can adjust brightness of dark area and middle gray level area of the picture. • L o w : Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture brighter. • M e d i u m: Express original picture levels. • H i g h: Make dark and middle gray level area of the picture darker. Dynamic Contrast (Off/Low/Medium(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only)/High) Dynamic Colour (Off/Low/High ) Black Level (Low/High) • L o w : The picture of the screen gets darker. • H i g h : The picture of the screen gets brighter. • A u t o : Realizing the black level of the screen and set it to High or Low automatically. ■ ■ Real Cinema/Film Mode (On/Off) TruMotion 100Hz or TruMotion 200Hz (Off/Low/High ) *This feature is not available for all models. ■ Adjust the brightness of the screen to prevent the screen from being too bright. Dims extremely bright pictures. ■ This feature is disable in “P P i c t u r e M o d e-VV i v i d, C i n e m a, I n t e l l i g e n t S e n s o r (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***)”. ■ ■ ■ You can watch a cinema-like video by eliminating judder effect. Use this function when you watch movies. This function can work when TruMotion is off. *This feature is not available for all models. • H i g h : Provides smoother picture movement. • L o w : Provides smooth picture movement. Use this setting for standard use. • O f f : Use this setting when "High" and "Low" setting result in noise. ■ TruMotion 100Hz can reduce perception of blur on fast moving scenes by displaying one hundred images per second. ■ TruMotion 200Hz displays 200 scenes per second by combining advanced 100Hz technology with scanning backlight. This technology is verified from Intertek & TüV Rheinland. ■ It is used for the best picture quality without any motion blur or judder when you enter a quick image or Film Source. ■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC,HDMI-PC mode. ■ If you enable "TruMotion 100Hz or TruMotion 200Hz", noise may appear on the screen. If this occurs, set "TruMotion 100Hz or TruMotion 200Hz" to "Off". PICTURE CONTROL Eye Care (On/Off) Set black level of the screen to proper level. This function enables to select 'Low' or 'High' in the following mode: AV(NTSC-M), HDMI or Component. Otherwise, 'Black level' is set to 'Auto'. 121 PICTURE CONTROL • S t a n d a r d : Mode to reproduce original colour according to the standard of Colour Gamut (Wide/Standard) input signal independent of the display characteristics. • W i d e : Mode to use and set the rich colour area of the display. ■ Maximize the utilization for colour area that can be expressed. Edge Enhancer(LCD TV/LED LCD TV :Off/Low/High Plasma TV:On/Off) Shows clearer and distinctive yet natural corners of the video. P i c t u r e M o d e-C C i n e m a, E x p e r t.”(LCD TV/LED LCD This function is enabled in “P TV only) *This feature is not available for all models. ■ This is the function to express richer colour. ■ This function is enabled in "Picture mode - Cinema, Expert" when xvYCC signal is inputted through HDMI ■ ■ xvYCC (Auto/off/on) *This feature is not available for all models. ■ As the technology to reduce the power consumption while keeping the same brightness, this has the effect of reducing power consumption, improvement in contrast. OPC (On/Off) Colour Standard (SD/HD) PICTURE CONTROL Expert Pattern (Off/Expert1/Expert2) A Colour Filter (Off/Red/Green/Blue) ■ A ■ Colour Temperature [Expert Control](LCD TV/LED LCD TV), White Balance(Plasma TV) (Medium/Warm/Cool) Colour Management System 122 ■ Converts the colour of a different video to HD colour. This function is set for SD video (BT-601) and HD video (BT-709) colour format. This is the pattern necessary for expert adjustment. This function is enabled in "Picture Mode - Expert" when you watch DTV. This is the function to filter the specific colours of the video. You can use the RGB filter to set colour saturation and hue accurately. This is the function to adjust the overall colour of the screen to the feeling you want. a. • Method : 2 Points • Pattern: Inner, Outer • Red/Green/Blue Contrast, Red/Green/Blue Brightness: The adjustment range is -50 to +50. b. • Method : 10 point IRE(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 20 Point IRE(Plasma TV) • Pattern: Inner / Outer • IRE (Institute of Radio Engineers) is the unit to display the size of the video signal and can be set among 10, 20, 30 to 100(LCD TV/LED LCD TV), 5, 10, 15 to 100(Plasma TV). You can adjust Red, Green or Blue according to each setting. • Luminance: This function displays calculated luminance value for 2.2 gamma. You can input luminance value you want at 100 IRE, than the target luminance value for 2.2 gamma is displayed at every 10 steps from 10 IRE to 90 IRE.(LCD TV/LED LCD TV only) • Red/Green/Blue: The adjustment range is -50 to +50. As the tool used by the experts to make adjustments by using the test patterns, this does not affect other colours but can be used to selectively adjust the 6 colour areas (Red/Green/Blue/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow). Colour difference may not be distinctive even when you make the adjustments for the general video. ■ Adjusts Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta. • Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Colour : The adjustment range is -30 to +30. • Red/Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/Magenta Tint : The adjustment range is -30 to +30. ■ This feature is disable in RGB-PC and HDMI (PC) mode. ■ PICTURE RESET Settings of the selected picture modes return to the default factory settings. PICTURE Move PICTURE OK E E • Contrast 90 • Brightness 50 • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Sharpness 60 ? All picture setting will be resetted. • Colour 60 continue? G • Tint 0 R 0 R G • Advanced Control • Advanced Control Yes PictureReset Reset ••Picture PictureReset Reset ••Picture Screen No Screen 3 Select P I C T U R E. Select Y e s or N o. OK 2 OK OK 90 • Tint 1 MENU Move • Contrast 4 Select P i c t u r e R e s e t. OK Initialize the adjusted value. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. After analyzing the signal of the input video by areas of the screen, it adjusts the backlight to improve the contrast ratio. PICTURE Move PICTURE OK E • Brightness 50 • Sharpness 70 • Sharpness 70 • Colour 60 • Colour 60 0 R G • Tint • Advanced Control 0 R G • Advanced Control • Picture Reset • Picture Reset Screen LED Local Local Dimming Dimming LED OK E 50 • Tint 1 MENU Move • Brightness PICTURE CONTROL LED LOCAL DIMMING (Only 42/47LH90**) Screen : :Off Off Select P I C T U R E. LED LED Local Local Dimming Dimming Off Off : :Off On On 3 OK Select O n or O f f. 2 OK Select L E D L o c a l D i m m i n g. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 123 PICTURE CONTROL POWER INDICATOR (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 19/22/26LH20**, 19/22/26LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 32/42/47LF51**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) It helps you adjust the brightness of moving LED and sound when power is turned on. S t a r t u p S o u n d(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) Set Startup Sound to O f f , L o w , M e d i u m or H i g h when the power is turned on. Standby Light Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to O f f, L o w or H i g h in standby mode.(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**) Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to O n or O f f in standby mode.(except for 32/37/42/47LH70**) Power Light Determines whether to set the indicator light on the front of the TV to O n or O f f when the power turns on. OPTION Move OK OPTION Move OK E E SIMPLINK : On SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Simple Manual Set ID Power Indicator :1 Demo Mode Mode Setting Power Indicator :1 Startup Sound : On Demo Mode : On Standby Light On : Store Demo Mode Setting : StoreLight Demo Power On Factory Reset Set ID F Medium G Factory Reset Close PICTURE CONTROL 1 MENU Select O P T I O N. 2 OK Select P o w e r I n d i c a t o r. 3 OK 4 Select S t a r t u p S o u n d(Only 32/37/42/47LH70**), S t a n d b y L i g h t or P o w e r L i g h t. Select your desired Source. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 124 IMAGE STICKING MINIMIZATION (ISM) METHOD (PLASMA TV ONLY) A frozen or still picture displayed on the screen for prolonged periods will result in a ghost image remaining even when you change the image. Avoid allowing a fixed image to remain on the screen for prolonged periods. White Wash White wash removes permanent images from the screen. Note: An excessive permanent image may be impossible to clear entirely with White Wash. Orbiter Orbiter may help prevent ghost images. However, it is best not to allow any fixed image to remain on the screen. To avoid a permanent image on the screen, the screen will move every 2 minutes. Colour Wash The colour block with the screen moved a little and the white pattern are alternately displayed. It is difficult to sense the afterimage occurred while the temporary afterimage is removed and the colour pattern is operating. OPTION Move OK OPTION OK E E SIMPLINK : On SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Simple Manual :1 Set ID ISM ISM Method Method : Normal ISM Method Normal ::Normal Demo Mode : On Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Mode Setting Select O P T I O N. Factory Reset :1 Normal Orbiter : Store Demo Colour Wash White Wash • If you do not need this function, set N o r m a l . PICTURE CONTROL Set ID Factory Reset 1 MENU Move 2 OK Select I S M M e t h o d. 3 Select N o r m a l , O r b i t e r , C o l o u r W a s h or W h i t e W a s h . OK 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 125 PICTURE CONTROL DEMO MODE Display the slide show to explain the various logo of this TV. It is not possible to use D e m o M o d e in H o m e U s e mode. In S t o r e D e m o, D e m o M o d e is automatically set to O n. Once D e m o M o d e is set to O f f in S t o r e D e m o, D e m o M o d e does not run and only the screen is reset. The screen is reset automatically after 5 minutes in D e m o M o d e. OPTION Move OK OPTION Move E : On SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Key Lock : Off Simple Manual Set ID OK E SIMPLINK Simple Manual :1 Set ID Demo DemoMode Mode : On On Power Indicator Demo DemoMode Mode : On On Off Off Mode Setting : Store Demo Mode Setting : Store Demo On On On(LED On(LED On) On) Power Indicator Factory Reset :1 Factory Reset (Except for 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) PICTURE CONTROL 1 MENU On(LED Off) (Only 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) Select OPTION. 2 OK Select Demo Mode. OK Select O n to show the various logo of TV. OK Return to TV viewing. If you want to stop the demo, press any button. (except for + , - button) MUTE, 3 4 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 126 MODE SETTING H o m e U s e ” mode for the best picture in your home environment. We recommend setting the TV to “H S t o r e D e m o ” mode is an optimal setting for displaying at stores.. “S OPTION Move OK OPTION Move OK E SIMPLINK : On SIMPLINK Key Lock : Off Key Lock :1 Demo Mode Set ID Power Indicator Power Indicator ModeSetting Setting Mode : On Demo Mode StoreDemo Demo ::Store Mode ModeSetting Setting Factory Reset Selecting the environment. :1 Choose the setting mode you want. : On StoreDemo Demo :: Store Store Demo Factory Reset E Home Use Select [Home Use] to use this TV at home. To use this TV at store, select [Store Demo]. PICTURE CONTROL 1 MENU : Off Simple Manual Simple Manual Set ID : On Select OPTION. 2 OK Select Mode Setting. 3 Select Store Demo or Home Use. OK 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 127 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL AUTO VOLUME LEVELER AVL automatically remains on the same level of volume if you change programmes. Because each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions, volume adjustment may be needed every time the channel is changed. This feature allows users to enjoy stable volume levels by making automatic adjustments for each program. If sound quality or volume is not at the level you want, it is recommended to use a separate home theater system or amp to cope with different user environments. AUDIO Auto Volume Clear Voice II Move Auto Volume Clear Voice II : Off • Level Balance Sound Mode 3 - + 0 L R 2 OK Move OK Off Off : :Off Off : Off On • Level 3 - + 0 L R Balance Sound Mode : Standard : Standard • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 E 1 MENU AUDIO OK ::Off Off E Select A U D I O. Select A u t o V o l u m e. SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 3 OK Select O n or O f f. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 128 CLEAR VOICE II By differentiating the human sound range from others, it helps users listen to human voices better. AUDIO Auto Volume ClearVoice VoiceIIII Clear Move : Off Off : :Off • Level Balance Sound Mode AUDIO OK 3 - + 0 L R Clear Voice II : Off Off Off • Level On 3 - + 0 L R Sound Mode : Standard : Standard • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 Select A U D I O. OK : Off Balance E E 1 MENU Move Auto Volume O n” for C l e a r V o i c e I I, S R S • If you select “O T r u S u r r o u n d X T feature will not work. • Select levels from ‘-6’ to ’+6’. OK Select C l e a r V o i c e I I. OK Select O n or O f f. 3 Adjustment for Clear Voice Level With selecting On 4 OK Select L e v e l. OK Make desired adjustment. 5 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 2 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 129 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL PRESET SOUND SETTINGS-SOUND MODE You can select your preferred sound setting; Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport or Game and you can also adjust the Treble, Bass. Sound Mode lets you enjoy the best sound without any Special adjustment as the TV sets the appropriate sound options based on the programme content. Standard, Music, Cinema, Sport and Game are preset for optimum sound quality at the factory. Standard Music Cinema Sport Game Offers standard-quality sound. Optimizes sound for listening to music. Optimizes sound for watching movies. Optimizes sound for watching sports events. Optimizes sound for playing games. AUDIO Move Auto Volume Clear Voice II Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II • Level Balance Sound Mode Mode Sound AUDIO OK : Off 3 - + 0 L R : Standard Balance • SRS TruSurround XT : Off 50 • Bass 50 E SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 1 MENU Select A U D I O. OK : Off • Level Sound Mode • Treble Move : Off :: Standard Standard 3 - 0 L + R Standard Standard Music • SRS TruSurround XT - : Off Cinema • Treble 50 Sport • Bass 50 Game E + + + • You can also adjust S o u n d M o d e in the Q . M e n u. 2 OK Select S o u n d M o d e. 3 OK Select S t a n d a r d , M u s i c , C i n e m a , S p o r t or G a m e. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 130 SOUND SETTING ADJUSTMENT -USER MODE AUDIO Move Auto Volume Clear Voice II Auto Volume Clear Voice II : Off • Level Balance Sound Sound Mode Mode AUDIO OK : Off 3 - + 0 L R : :Standard Standard (User) Balance Sound Mode 3 - 0 L + R Standard Standard (User) ::Standard Standard (User) • Treble 50 Music • SRS TruSurround XT :Cinema Off • Treble 50 Sport • Bass 50 • Bass 50 Game E E 2 OK : Off • Level • SRS TruSurround XT : Off 1 MENU Move : Off Select A U D I O. OK Select S o u n d M o d e. OK Select S t a n d a r d , M u s i c , C i n e m a , S p o r t or G a m e. OK Select T r e b l e or B a s s. OK Set the desired sound level. 3 4 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. SRS TRUSURROUND XT Select this option to sound realistic. 1 MENU 2 Select A U D I O. OK Select S R S T r u S u r r o u n d X T. OK Select O n or O f f. S R S T r u S u r r o u n d X T : TruSurround XT is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5.1 multicannel content over two speakers. SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 5 3 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. G G is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. TruSurround XT technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. 131 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL BALANCE You can adjust the sound balance of the speakers to preferred levels. AUDIO Move Auto Volume Clear Voice II : Off Auto Volume : Off Clear Voice II • Level Balance Balance Sound Mode AUDIO OK 3 - + 0 LL RR Move : Off • Level Sound Mode L- R+ 0 F R R : Standard • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 E 1 MENU 3 Balance 00L L Balance : Standard OK : Off L R G Close E 3 Select A U D I O. OK 2 Make desired adjustment. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. Select B a l a n c e. OK • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. TV SPEAKERS ON/ OFF SETUP You can adjust the TV internal speaker status. In A V 1, A V 2, A V 3, C O M P O N E N T, R G B and H D M I 1 with HDMI to DVI cable, the TV speaker can be operational even when there is no video signal. If you wish to use an external Hi-Fi system, turn off the TV’s internal speakers. AUDIO Move AUDIO OK Move E E SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 • Reset • Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM Digital Audio Out : PCM Off Off TV Speaker Speaker TV TV TVSpeaker Speaker On Off : On Audio Description :On •Volume 1 MENU 2 OK :: On Off Audio Description :On 0 - Select A U D I O. + •Volume 0 - + 3 OK Select O n or O f f. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. OK Select T V S p e a k e r. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. ! NOTE When the TV speaker is turned off while the Simplink home theater is operating, the sound output automatically switches to the Home theater speaker, but when the TV speaker is turned on, the sound output the TV speaker. Some menus in A U D I O are disabled when TV Speaker is set to Off. G G 132 DTV AUDIO SETTING (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) (This menu is enabled only in Sweden. ) When different audio types exist in an input signal, this function allows you to select the audio type you want. AUDIO Move OK AUDIO Move E E • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 • Reset 2 OK • Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM Digital Audio Out : PCM Auto Auto TV Speaker : On DTVAudio AudioSetting Setting: :Auto Auto DTV TV Speaker HE-AAC DTVAudio AudioSetting Setting: :Auto Auto DTV Dolby Digital Audio Description :On Audio Description :On MPEG E 1 MENU OK : On E Select A U D I O. Select D T V A u d i o S e t t i n g. OK Select A u t o , H E - A A C , D o l b y D i g i t a l or M P E G. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. • A u t o: Automatically outputs in the order H E - A A C > D o l b y D i g i t a l > M P E G. • H E - A A C , D o l b y D i g i t a l , M P E G: Allows users to select the audio type they want. If M P E G is selected, M P E G is always outputted. If M P E G is not supported, H E - A A C and D o l b y D i g i t a l are selected in that order. • Refer to p. 140 (Audio Language Selection) SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 3 133 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL SELECTING DIGITAL AUDIO OUT This function allows you to select your preferred Digital Audio Output. The TV can only output DOLBY Digital if a channel is broadcast with Dolby Digital audio. When Dolby digital is available, selecting Auto in the Digital Audio Out menu will set SPDIF(Sony Philips Digital InterFace) output to Dolby Digital. If Auto is selected in the digital audio out menu when dolby digital is not available, SPDIF output will be PCM(Pulse-code modulation). Even if both Dolby Digital and Audio language have been set in a channel which broadcast Dolby Digital Audio, only Dolby Digital will be played. AUDIO Move AUDIO OK Move E • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 • Reset • Reset Digital Digital Audio Audio Out Out : :PCM PCM TV Speaker SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 1 MENU 2 OK 3 OK Auto PCM PCM Digital DigitalAudio AudioOut Out :: PCM PCM : On TV Speaker Audio Description :On •Volume OK E • SRS TruSurround XT : Off : On Audio Description :On 0 - + •Volume - + Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby “and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Select A U D I O. Select D i g i t a l A u d i o O u t. 0 • There is a possibility that when HDMI mode, some DVD players do not make SPDIF sound. At that time, set the output of the digital audio of the DVD player to PCM. (In HDMI, Dolby Digital Plus is not supported). Select A u t o or P C M. Item Auto(Speaker On) Auto(Speaker Off) PCM Audio Input MPEG DD DD+ HE-AAC MPEG DD DD+ HE-AAC PCM Digital Audio output PCM DD DD PCM PCM DD DD DD PCM • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 134 AUDIO RESET Settings of the selected Sound Mode return to the default factory settings. AUDIO Move AUDIO OK Move E E • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 •• Reset Reset i Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker TV Speaker : On Audio Description :On 1 MENU 2 OK Resetsound mode configuration... • •Reset Resetting Digital Audio Out : PCM •Volume OK : On Audio Description :On 0 - + •Volume 0 - + Select A U D I O. Select R e s e t. SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 3 OK Initialize the adjusted value. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 135 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL AUDIO DESCRIPTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) This function is for the blind, and provides explanatory audio describing the current situation in a TV programme in addition to the basic audio. When Audio Description On is selected, basic audio and Audio Description are provided only for those programmes that have Audio Description included. AUDIO Move AUDIO OK Move E E • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • SRS TruSurround XT : Off • Treble 50 • Treble 50 • Bass 50 • Bass 50 • Reset 1 MENU • Reset Digital Audio Out : PCM Digital Audio Out : PCM TV Speaker : On : On Audio Description :On Audio Description Description :On Audio : On •Volume OK TV Speaker 0 - + : On •Volume Off On On 0 - + Select A U D I O. 2 OK SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 3 OK Select A u d i o D e s c r i p t i o n. Select O n or O f f. Adjustment for Audio Description Volume With selecting On 4 OK Select V o l u m e. OK Make desired adjustment. 5 • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 136 I/II Stereo/Dual Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) When a programme is selected, the sound information for the station appears with the programme number and station name. 1Q. MENU Select A u d i o. 2 Select the sound output. OK Broadcast On Screen Display Mono MONO Stereo STEREO Dual DUAL I, DUAL II, DUAL I+II Mono sound selection If the stereo signal is weak in stereo reception, you can switch to mono. In mono reception, the clarity of sound is improved. A Language selection for dual language broadcast If a programme can be received in two languages (dual language), you can switch to DUAL I, DUAL II or DUAL I+II. DUAL I DUAL II DUAL I+II Sends the primary broadcast language to the loudspeakers. Sends the secondary broadcast language to the loudspeakers. Sends a separate language to each loudspeaker. SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL A 137 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL NICAM Reception (In Analogue Mode Only) If the TV is equipped with a receiver for NICAM reception, high quality NICAM (Near Instantaneous Companding Audio Multiplex) digital sound can be received. Sound output can be selected according to the type of broadcast received. SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL 138 1 When NICAM mono is received, you can select N I C A M M O N O or F M M O N O. 2 When NICAM stereo is received, you can select N I C A M S T E R E O or F M M O N O. If the stereo signal is weak, switch to F M M O N O. 3 When NICAM dual is received, you can select N I C A M D U A L I, N I C A M D U A L I I or N I C A M D U A L I + I I or F M M O N O. Speaker Sound Output Selection In AV, Component, RGB and HDMI mode, you can select output sound for the left and right loudspeakers. Select the sound output. L + R : Audio signal from audio L input is sent to the left loudspeaker and audio signal from audio R input is sent to the right loudspeaker. L + L : Audio signal from audio L input is sent to left and right loudspeakers. R + R : Audio signal from audio R input is sent to left and right loudspeakers. ON-SCREEN MENU LANGUAGE / COUNTRY SELECTION The installation guide menu appears on the TV screen when it is switched on for the first time. 1 OK Select your desired language. OK Select your country. 2 * If you want to change Language/ Country selection 1 MENU Select O P T I O N. 2 OK Select M e n u L a n g u a g e or C o u n t r y. OK Select your desired language or country. 3 4 Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. ! NOTE If you do not finish the set-up I n s t a l l a t i o n G u i d e by pressing R E T U R N or if you time out on the OSD (On Screen Display) the installation menu will continuously appear until the set up is completed whenever the TV is switched on. G If you select the wrong local country, teletext may not appear correctly on the screen and some problems may occur during teletext operation. G The CI (Common Interface) function may not be applied based on country broadcasting circumstances. G DTV mode control buttons may not function based on country broadcasting circumstances. G In country that Digital broadcasting regulation isn’t fixed, some DTV function may not work depending on digital broadcasting circumstances. G The Country Setting "UK" should only be activated in UK. G If the country setting is set to "--", European terrestrial/cable digital standard broadcasting programmes are available, but some DTV functions may not work properly. G SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL OK 139 SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL LANGUAGE SELECTION (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) The Audio function allows selection of a preferred language. If audio data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language audio will be played. Use the Subtitle function when two or more subtitle languages are broadcast. If subtitle data in a selected language is not broadcast, the default language subtitle will be displayed. When the languages you selected as the primary for Audio Language and Subtitle Language are not supported, you can select language in secondary category. 1 MENU 1 MENU Select O P T I O N. 2 2 Select A u d i o L a n g u a g e or S u b t i t l e L a n g u a g e. OK Select O P T I O N. OK 3 Select Hard of Hearing( 3 Select your desired language. OK OK Select O n or O f f. 4 OK Save. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. SOUND & LANGUAGE CONTROL < Audio Language Selection > G When two or more audio languages are broadcast, you can select the audio language. 1Q. MENU 2 Audio Language OSD Information Display N.A Select A u d i o Select an audio language. 3 < Subtitle Language Selection > G When two or more subtitle languages are broadcast, you can select the subtitle language with the SUBTITLE button on the remote control. button to select a subtitle language. G Press the Status Not Available MPEG Audio Dolby Digital Audio Audio for “Visual Impaired” Audio for “Hearing Impaired” Dolby Digital Plus Audio AAC Audio Select L+R, L+L or R+R. Subtitle Language OSD Information Display N.A Status Not Available Teletext Subtitle Subtitle for “Hard of Hearing” - The audio/subtitles can be displayed in a simpler form with 1 to 3 characters broadcast by the service provider. - When you select supplementary Audio (Audio for “Visual/Hearing Impaired”) the TV may output a part of the Main audio. 140 ). TIME SETTING CLOCK SETUP The clock is set automatically when receiving a digital signal. (You can set the clock manually only if the TV has no DTV signal.) You must set the time correctly before using on/off timer function. When you select a Time Zone city, the TV time is set by the time offset information based on Time Zone and GMT (Greenwich Mean Time) which is received with the broadcast signal and the time is set automatically by a digital signal. Once Clock is set in DTV mode, you cannot change time, but if the city name in Time Zone is changed into offset, you can change time by 1 hour. TIME Move TIME OK Move OK Date Clock Clock Clock Off Time : Off Off Time : Off On Time : Off On Time : Off Sleep Timer : Off Sleep Timer : Off 01 Month Mar Year 2008 Hour 16 Minute 09 Time Zone London GMT Close 1 MENU OK Select C l o c k. 3 OK 4 Select either the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option. TIME SETTING 2 Select T I M E. Set the year, month, date, time or Time Zone option. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 141 TIME SETTING AUTO ON/OFF TIME SETTING The Off time function automatically switches the TV to standby at a preset time. Two hours after the TV is switched on by the on time function it will automatically switch back to standby mode unless a button has been pressed. The Off time function overrides the On time function if both are set to the same time. The TV must be in standby mode for the On time to work. TIME Move TIME OK Clock Move Clock Off Time : Off On Time : Off Off Time On Time Time On Sleep Timer : Off Sleep Timer OK 1 Mar. 2007 16:09 : Off Repeat F Off Off :: Off Hour 00 : Off Minute 00 Input G Antenna Programme TV1 Volume 30 Close 1 MENU Select T I M E. • To cancel O n / O f f T i m e function, select O f f. • For On Time function only 1 2 OK Select O f f T i m e or O n T i m e. TIME SETTING 2 3 OK 4 Select I n p u t. Select R e p e a t. Select O f f, O n c e, D a i l y, M o n ~ F r i, M o n ~ S a t, S a t ~ S u n or S u n. 5 Set the hour. 3 Select A n t e n n a or C a b l e, A V 1~ 3 , C o m p o n e n t, R G B or H D M I 1 , H D M I 2(Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**),, H D M I 3(Except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22LU50**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**),, H D M I 4(Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**). Set the programme. 6 Set the minutes. 4 Adjust volume level at switch-on. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 142 SLEEP TIMER SETTING You do not have to remember to switch the TV off before you go to sleep. The sleep timer automatically switches the TV to standby after the preset time has elapsed. 1Q. MENU 2 Select S l e e p T i m e r. Select O f f, 1 0, 2 0, 3 0, 6 0, 9 0, 1 2 0, 1 8 0 or 2 4 0 m i n.. • When you switch the TV off, the preset sleep timer is cancelled. • You can also adjust S l e e p T i m e r in the T I M E menu. TIME SETTING 143 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS SET PASSWORD & LOCK SYSTEM Enter the password, press ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’, ‘0’ on the remote control handset. If a channel is locked, enter the password to unlock it temporarily. LOCK Move Lock LockSystem System OK :: Off Off Move Lock System Off ::Off Off Off Set Password Set Password On Block Programme Block Programme Parental Guidance : Blocking Off Input Block 1 MENU LOCK Select L O C K. Parental Guidance OK : Blocking Off Input Block • If you forget your password, press ‘7’, ‘7’, ‘7’, ‘7’ on the remote control handset. 2 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS OK Select L o c k S y s t e m. OK Select O n. 3 4 OK 5 OK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Set the password. Input a 4-digit password. Be sure to remember this number! Re-enter new password for confirm. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 144 BLOCK PROGRAMME Blocks any programme that you do not want to watch or that you do not want your children to watch. O n”. It is available to use this function in L o c k S y s t e m ”O Enter a password to watch a blocked programme. 1 LOCK Lock System Move YLE TV1 OK : Off RADIO 2 YLE TV2 4 TV4 Stockholm 5 YLE FST 6 CNN Set Password Block Programme Parental Guidance DTV 1 YLE TV1 TV 8 YLE24 9 YLE Teema 24 TV4 Fakta 14 TV4 Film 50 TV400 : Blocking Off Input Block Pr. Change Navigation P Page Change Previous Block/Unblock 1 MENU Select L O C K. 2 OK Select B l o c k P r o g r a m m e. 3 OK Enter the B l o c k P r o g r a m m e. GREEN Select a programme to be locked. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS 4 • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 145 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS PARENTAL CONTROL (IN DIGITAL MODE ONLY) This function operates according to information from the broadcasting station. Therefore if the signal has incorrect information, this function does not operate. A password is required to gain access to this menu. This set is programmed to remember which option it was last set to even if you switch the set off. Prevents children from watching certain adult’s TV programmes, according to the ratings limit set. Enter a password to watch a blocked programme. Lock System Move OK : Off Lock System Set Password Set Password Block Programme Block Programme Parental Guidance Guidance Parental LOCK Blocking Off Off :: Blocking Input Block Parental Guidance Input Block Blocking : Permits all Move OffOK programmes : Off 10 and above 11 and above 12 and above Blocking Off Off :: Blocking 13 and above 14 and above 15 and above 16 and above 17 and above 18 and above E LOCK Blocking Off 1 MENU Select L O C K. 2 OK Select P a r e n t a l G u i d a n c e. OK Make appropriate adjustments. 3 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 146 EXTERNAL INPUT BLOCKING Enables you to block an input. O n”. It is available to use this function in L o c k S y s t e m ”O AV1 LOCK Lock System Move OK : Off Block Programme Block Programme : Blocking Off Input Input Block Block 1 MENU Lock System Set Password Set Password Parental Guidance LOCK F AV2 Off G Off Move AV3 : Off Component OK RGB Off Off Off Parental Guidance HDMI1 : Blocking Off Off Input Block Off (Except for 19/22LH20**, 19/22LD3**, 19/22LG31**) HDMI3 (Except for 19/22LU40**, Off 19/22LU50**, HDMI4 Off 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42LF25**, Close 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 26LG31**) (Only 32/37/42/47LH49**, 32/37/42/47/55LH50**, 32/37/42/47LH70**, 42/47LH90**, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**) HDMI2 Select L O C K. 2 Select I n p u t B l o c k. OK Select input source. OK Select O n or O f f. 3 4 5 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS OK • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 147 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS KEY LOCK The TV can be set so that the remote control is required to control it. This feature can be used to prevent unauthorized viewing. OPTION Move OPTION Move : English Menu Language : English Audio Language : English Audio Language : English Subtitle Language : English Subtitle Language Hard of Hearing( Country ) : Off : UK Input Label Hard of Hearing( Country OK : English ) : Off : UK Input Label SIMPLINK Key Lock : On : Off E 1 MENU OK Menu Language SIMPLINK Key Key Lock Lock E : On Off : Off : Off On On Select O P T I O N. O n’, if the TV is turned off, press the r / I, • In K e y L o c k ‘O OK Select K e y L o c k. OK Select O n or O f f. ) button on the TV or POWER INPUT, P D or E(or P INPUT, P or NUMBER buttons on the remote control then the set will be turned on. Key Lock On ’ • With the K e y L o c k O n, the display ‘ appears on the screen if any button on the front panel is pressed while viewing the TV. (Except for r / I button : Plasma TV only) 2 3 PARENTAL CONTROL / RATINGS 4 OK Save. • Press the M E N U button to return to normal TV viewing. • Press the R E T U R N button to move to the previous menu screen. 148 TELETEXT POWER ON/OFF TV/RAD POWER This feature is not available in all countries. AV MODE ENERGY SAVING LIST Q.VIEW Teletext is a free service broadcast by most TV stations which gives up-to-the-minute information on news, weather, television programmes, share prices and many other topics. The teletext decoder of this TV can support the SIMPLE, TOP and FASTEXT systems. SIMPLE (standard teletext) consists of a number of pages which are selected by directly entering the corresponding page number. TOP and FASTEXT are more modern methods allowing quick and easy selection of teletext information. MUTE MENU RETURN / EXIT SWITCH ON/OFF Q.MENU INFO Press the T E X T button to switch to teletext. The initial page or last page viewed appears on the screen. Two page numbers, TV station name, date and time are displayed on the screen headline. The first page number indicates your selection, while the second shows the current page displayed. Press the T E X T button to switch off teletext. The previous mode reappears. i GUIDE FAV MARK AV MODE RATIO SIMPLE TEXT A Page selection 1 Enter the desired page number as a three digit number with the NUMBER buttons. If during selection you press a wrong number, you must complete the three digit number and then re-enter the correct page number. The P button can be used to select the preceding or following page. 2 TOP TEXT The user guide displays four fields-red, green, yellow and blue at the bottom of the screen. The yellow field denotes the next group and the blue field indicates the next block. Block / group / page selection 1 4 With the blue button you can progress from block to block. Use the yellow button to proceed to the next group with automatic overflow to the next block. With the green button you can proceed to the next existing page with automatic overflow to the next group. Alternatively the P button can be used. The red button returns to the previous selection. Alternatively the P button can be used. A Direct page selection 2 3 As with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering it as a three digit number using the NUMBER buttons in TOP mode. TELETEXT A 149 TELETEXT FASTEXT The teletext pages are colour coded along the bottom of the screen and are selected by pressing the corresponding coloured button. A Page selection 1 2 3 4 Press the T . O P T button and then use button to select i menu. Display the index page. You can select the pages which are colour coded along the bottom line with corresponding coloured buttons. AS with SIMPLE teletext mode, you can select a page by entering its three digit page number with the NUMBER buttons in FASTEXT mode. The P button can be used to select the preceding or following page. SPECIAL TELETEXT FUNCTIONS ■ Press the T . O P T button and then use button to select the Text Option menu. i A Index Select the each index page. Text Option Index Time A Time When viewing a TV programme, select this menu to display the time at the top right hand corner of the screen. In the teletext mode, press this button to select a sub page number. The sub page number is displayed at the bottom of the screen. To hold or change the sub page, press the RED/GREEN, or NUMBER buttons. Hold Reveal Update Close A Hold Stops the automatic page change which will occur if a teletext page consists of 2 or more sub pages. The number of sub pages and the sub page displayed is, usually, shown on the screen below the time. When this menu is selected the stop symbol is displayed at the top left-hand corner of the screen and the automatic page change is inactive. TELETEXT ? A Reveal Select this menu to display concealed information, such as solutions to riddles or puzzles. A Update Displays the TV picture on the screen while waiting for a new teletext page. The display will appear at the top left hand corner of the screen. When the updated page is available then display will change to the page number. Select this menu again to view the updated teletext page. 150 DIGITAL TELETEXT *This function works in UK, Ireland only. The TV gives you access to digital teletext which is greatly improved in various aspects such as text, graphics etc. This digital teletext can access special digital teletext services and specific services which broadcast digital teletext. You should select off in the subtitle language menu to display teletext by pressing the SUBTITLE button. TELETEXT WITHIN DIGITAL SERVICE 1 Press the numeric or P button to select a digital service which broadcasts digital teletext. 2 Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto the next step by pressing TEXT, OK, , RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and etc.. 3 To change digital teletext service, select a different service by the numeric or P button. TELETEXT IN DIGITAL SERVICE Press the numeric or P button to select a certain service which broadcasts digital teletext. 2 Press the TEXT or coloured button to switch on teletext. 3 Follow the indications on digital teletext and move onto the next step by pressing OK, , RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE or NUMBER buttons and so on. 4 Press the TEXT or colour button to switch off digital teletext and return to TV viewing. DIGITAL TELETEXT 1 Some services may allow you to access text services by pressing the RED button. 151 APPENDIX TROUBLESHOOTING The TV does not operate properly. Check to see if there is any object between the TV and the remote control causing an obstruction. Ensure you are pointing the remote control directly at the TV. A Ensure that the batteries are installed with correct polarity (+ to +, - to -). A Install new batteries. A The remote control does not work Power is suddenly turned off Is the sleep timer set? A Check the power control settings. Has the Power supply been interrupted. A If the TV is switched on and there is no input signal, it will switch off automatically after 15 minutes. A The video function does not work. Check whether the TV is switched on. A Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast. A Is the power cord inserted correctly into the mains? A Check your antenna direction and/or location. A Test the mains outlet by plugging another TV into the same outlet. A No picture & No sound Picture appears slowly after switching on A This is normal, the image is muted during the TV startup process. Please contact your service centre, if the picture has not appeared after five minutes. Adjust Colour in menu option. A Allow a sufficient distance between the TV and the VCR. A Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast. A Are the video cables installed properly? A Activate any function to restore the brightness of the picture. A No or poor colour or poor picture Horizontal/vertical bars or picture shaking APPENDIX Poor reception on some channels Lines or streaks in pictures No picture when connecting HDMI 152 A Check for local interference such as an electrical appliance or power tool. Station or cable channel experiencing problems, tune to another station. Station signal is weak, reposition the antenna to receive weaker stations. A Check for sources of possible interference. A A A Check antenna (Change the position of the antenna). A Check that your HDMI cable is version 1.3 or higher. If the HDMI cables don’t support HDMI version 1.3, flickering or no screen display can result. Please use the latest cables that support at least HDMI version 1.3. The audio function does not work. A Picture OK & No sound A A A No output from one of the speakers + or - button. Press the Sound muted? Press MUTE button. Try another channel. The problem may be with the broadcast. Are the audio cables installed properly? A Adjust B a l a n c e in menu option. Unusual sound from inside the TV A A change in ambient humidity or temperature may result in an unusual noise when the TV is switched on or off and does not indicate a fault with the TV. No sound when connecting HDMI or USB A Check HDMI cable over version 1.3. Check USB cable over version 2.0. A *This feature is not available for all models. There is a problem in PC mode. (Only PC mode applied) The signal is out of range (Invalid format) Vertical bar or stripe on background & Horizontal Noise & Incorrect position Screen colour is unstable or single colour A Adjust resolution, horizontal frequency, or vertical frequency. A Check the input source. A Use Auto configure or adjust clock, phase, or H/V position. (Option) A Check the signal cable. Reinstall the PC video card. A There is a problem with PICTURE settings. A It means that the TV is currently set to S t o r e D e m o mode. To switch to H o m e u s e mode you should do the followings: From the TV Menu, choose O P T I O N -> Choose M o d e S e t t i n g -> Choose H o m e u s e. Now, you have completed switching to the H o m e u s e mode. APPENDIX When the user changes the picture settings, the TV automatically converts back to the initial settings after a certain period of time. 153 APPENDIX MAINTENANCE Early malfunctions can be prevented. Careful and regular cleaning can prolong the life of your new TV. Caution: Be sure to switch the power off and unplug the power cord before you begin any cleaning. Cleaning the Screen 1 A good way to keep the dust off your screen for a while is to wet a soft cloth in a mixture of lukewarm water and a little fabric softener or dish washing detergent. Wring the cloth until it is almost dry, and then use it to wipe the screen. 2 Ensure there is no excess water on the screen. Allow any water or dampness to evaporate before switching on. Cleaning the Cabinet To remove dirt or dust, wipe the cabinet with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth. A Do not to use a wet cloth. A Extended Absence CAUTION G APPENDIX 154 If you expect to leave your TV dormant for prolonged periods (such as a holiday), unplug the power cord to protect against possible damage from lightning or power surges. PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS 32LH40** MODELS Dimensions 32LH4000-ZA 37LH40** 32LH4010-ZD 32LH4020-ZC 37LH4000-ZA 37LH4010-ZD 37LH4020-ZC with stand 804.4 mm x 586.3 mm x 223.8 mm 804.4 mm x 589.1 mm x 210.9 mm 924.7 mm x 666.7 mm x 296.2 mm 924.7 mm x 667.7 mm x 270.6 mm without stand 804.4 mm x 529.2 mm x 81.0 mm 804.4 mm x 529.2 mm x 81.0 mm 924.7 mm x 599.9 mm x 89.6 mm 924.7 mm x 599.9 mm x 89.6 mm (Width x Height x Depth) with stand without stand Weight Power requirement Power Consumption 12.7 kg 11.5 kg 12.7 kg 11.5 kg 15.8 kg 14.0 kg 15.8 kg 14.0 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W 42LH40** MODELS Dimensions 42LH4000-ZA 47LH40** 42LH4010-ZD 42LH4020-ZC 47LH4000-ZA 47LH4010-ZD 47LH4020-ZC with stand 1036.0 mm x 721.3 mm x 296.2 mm 1036.0 mm x 722.3 mm x 270.6 mm 1153.2 mm x 791.5 mm x 337.4 mm 1153.2 mm x 793.3 mm x 319.0 mm without stand 1036.0 mm x 655.4 mm x 89.8 mm 1036.0 mm x 655.4 mm x 89.8 mm 1153.2 mm x 719.0 mm x 99.8 mm 1153.2 mm x 719.0 mm x 99.8 mm with stand without stand 18.9 kg 17.1 kg 18.9 kg 17.1 kg 22.2 kg 19.6 kg 22.2 kg 19.6 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 280 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 280 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition ■ 0°C to 40°C Operating Humidity Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX 155 APPENDIX 32LH50** MODELS Dimensions 32LH5000-ZB 37LH50** 32LH5010-ZD 32LH5020-ZE 37LH5000-ZB 37LH5010-ZD 37LH5020-ZE with stand 815.0 mm x 583.8 mm x 223.8 mm 815.0 mm x 585.6 mm x 210.9 mm 940.8 mm x 665.2 mm x 296.2 mm 940.8 mm x 666.2 mm x 270.6 mm without stand 815.0 mm x 529.6 mm x 82.0 mm 815.0 mm x 529.6 mm x 82.0 mm 940.8 mm x 603.5 mm x 90.6 mm 940.8 mm x 603.5 mm x 90.6 mm with stand without stand 12.6 kg 11.4 kg 12.6 kg 11.4 kg 16.3 kg 14.5 kg 16.3 kg 14.5 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption 42LH50** MODELS Dimensions 42LH5000-ZB 47LH50** 42LH5010-ZD 42LH5020-ZE 47LH5000-ZB 47LH5010-ZD 47LH5020-ZE with stand 1052.2 mm x 719.1 mm x 296.2 mm 1052.2 mm x 720.1 mm x 270.6 mm 1173.4 mm x 789.7 mm x 337.4 mm 1173.4 mm x 791.4 mm x 319.0 mm without stand 1052.2 mm x 657.3 mm x 90.8 mm 1052.2 mm x 657.3 mm x 90.8 mm 1173.4 mm x 723.4 mm x 100.8 mm 1173.4 mm x 723.4 mm x 100.8 mm with stand without stand 19.0 kg 17.2 kg 19.0 kg 17.2 kg 23.4 kg 20.8 kg 23.6 kg 20.8 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 260 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 260 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition Supported movie files ■ APPENDIX 156 Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. 55LH50** MODELS Dimensions 55LH5000-ZB with stand 1357.0 mm x 901.0 mm x 423.0 mm without stand 1357.0 mm x 835.4 mm x 109.6 mm with stand without stand 36.4 kg 32.9 kg (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 350 W Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions 42LH90** 47LH90** 42LH9000-ZA 47LH9000-ZA with stand 1065.9 mm x 776 mm x 361.7 mm 1179 mm x 851.4 mm x 398.8 mm without stand 1065.9 mm x 716.4 mm x 94.4 mm 1179 mm x 780.6 mm x 105.9 mm with stand without stand 23.2 kg 19.5 kg 27.3 kg 23.5 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 190 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 220 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Supported movie files ■ 0°C to 40°C Operating Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX 157 APPENDIX 19LG31** 22LG31** 26LG31** 19LG3100-ZA 22LG3100-ZA 26LG3100-ZA MODELS Dimensions with stand 458.8 mm x 391.0 mm x 189.2 mm 522.2 mm x 431.5 mm x 189.0 mm 663.3 mm x 508.2 mm x 227.3 mm without stand 458.8 mm x 344.5 mm x 69.0 mm 522.2 mm x 384.2 mm x 69.0 mm 663.3 mm x 449.8 mm x 80.0 mm with stand without stand 4.5 kg 4.2 kg 5.6 kg 5.34 kg 10.1 kg 8.6 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 50 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 55 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 110 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption 32LG33** 37LG33** 42LG33** 32LG3300-ZA 37LG3300-ZA 42LG3300-ZA MODELS with stand 801.8mmx 604.2mmx 227.3 mm 919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 293.8 mm 1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 293.8 mm without stand 801.8mmx 544.1mmx 79.0 mm 919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm 1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm with stand without stand 13.4 kg 18.8 kg 11.9 kg 16.2 kg 23.6 kg 21.0 kg Power requirement AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz Power Consumption 150 W 180 W Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W 32LF51** 42LF51** 47LF51** 32LF5100-ZA 42LF5100-ZA 47LF5100-ZA MODELS with stand 813.8 mm x 598.8 mm x 227.3 mm 1034.0 mm x 735.0 mm x 293.8 mm 1156.2 mm x 813.1 mm x 342.9 mm without stand 813.8 mm x 540.4 mm x 79.0 mm 1034.0 mm x 663.0 mm x 92.0 mm 1156.2 mm x 739.2 mm x 103.0 mm with stand without stand 14.1 kg 22.5 kg 29.2 kg 12.6 kg 20.0 kg 24.6 kg Power requirement AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz Power Consumption 150 W 210 W 280 W Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) APPENDIX Operating Temperature Environment condition ■ 158 Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. MODELS Dimensions 19LU50** 22LU50** 26LU50** 19LU5000-ZA 19U5010-ZB 19LU5020-ZC 22LU5000-ZA 22U5010-ZB 22LU5020-ZC 26LU5000-ZA 26U5010-ZB 26LU5020-ZC with stand 462.0 mm x 373.0 mm x 182.0 mm 529.1 mm x 416.6 mm x 196.0 mm 668.0 mm x 538.3 mm x 236 mm without stand 462.0 mm x 305.0 mm x 65.0 mm 529.1 mm x 342.3 mm x 65.0 mm 668.0 mm x 456.0 mm x 81.0 mm with stand without stand 4.4 kg 3.7 kg 5.4 kg 4.6 kg 8.9 kg 7.7 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 40 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 55 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 110 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption 19LU40** MODELS Dimensions 19LU4000-ZB 22LU40** 19LU4010-ZC 22LU4000-ZB 22LU4010-ZC with stand 474.0 mm x 390.0 mm x 182.0 mm 474.0 mm x 390.0 mm x 182.0 mm 542.9 mm x 429.3 mm x 196.0 mm 542.9 mm x 429.3 mm x 196.0 mm without stand 474.0 mm x 357.9 mm x 65.0 mm 474.0 mm x 357.9 mm x 65.0 mm 542.9 mm x 397.8 mm x 65.0 mm 542.9 mm x 397.8 mm x 65.0 mm with stand without stand 4.4 kg 3.9 kg 4.4 kg 3.9 kg 5.5 kg 5.0 kg 5.5 kg 5.0 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 40 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 40 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 55 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 55 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition ■ Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX 159 APPENDIX 19LH20** 22LH20** 19LH2000-ZA / 19LH2010-ZB 19LH2020-ZC / 19LH201C-ZA 22LH2000-ZA / 22LH2010-ZB 22LH2020-ZC / 22LH201C-ZA with stand 462.4 mm x 353.0 mm x 171.0 mm 533.4 mm x 397.0 mm x 171.0 mm without stand 462.4 mm x 308.0 mm x 65.0 mm 533.4 mm x 351.7 mm x 65.0 mm with stand without stand 3.8 kg 3.6 kg 4.8 kg 4.6 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 40 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 55 W 26LH20** 26LH2000-ZA 26LH2010-ZB 26LH2020-ZC 26LH201C-ZA 32LH20** 32LH2000-ZA 32LH2010-ZB 32LH2020-ZC 32LH201C-ZA MODELS Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions with stand 667.0 mm x 504.0 mm x 224.0 mm 667.0 mm x 507.0 mm x 211.0 mm 805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm 805.0 mm x 586.0 mm x 211.0 mm without stand 667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm 667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm 805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9mm with stand without stand 8.9 kg 7.8 kg 8.9 kg 7.8 kg 11.5 kg 10.3 kg 11.5 kg 10.3 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 110 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 110 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions 37LH20** 37LH2000-ZA 37LH2010-ZB 37LH2020-ZC 37LH201C-ZA 805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9mm 42LH20** 42LH2000-ZA 42LH2010-ZB 42LH2020-ZC 42LH201C-ZA with stand 922.0 mm x 659.0 mm x 297.0 mm 922.0 mm x 660.0 mm x 270.6 mm 1028.0 mm x 715.4 mm x 297.0 mm 1028.0 mm x 716.4 mm x 270.6 mm without stand 922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm with stand without stand 14.8 kg 13.0 kg 14.8 kg 13.0 kg 18.0 kg 16.2 kg 18.0 kg 16.2 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) APPENDIX Operating Temperature Environment condition ■ 160 922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm 1028.0 mm x 655.0 mm x 88.7 mm 1028.0 mm x 655.0 mm x 88.7 mm Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. MODELS Dimensions 32LH3*** 32LH3010-ZB/ 32LH3000-ZA 32LH3030-ZE/ 32LH3020-ZD 32LH3040-ZG 32LH3800-ZD 32LH301C-ZA 37LH3*** 37LH3010-ZB/ 37LH3030-ZE/ 37LH3040-ZG 37LH3000-ZA 37LH3020-ZD 37LH3800-ZD 37LH301C-ZA with stand 805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm 805.0 mm x 586.0 mm x 211.0 mm 922.0 mm x 659.0 mm x 297.0 mm 922.0 mm x 660.0 mm x 270.6 mm without stand 805.0 mm x 531.0 mm x 79.9 mm 805.0 mm x 531.0 mm x 79.9 mm 922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm 922.0 mm x 595.0 mm x 88.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) with stand without stand Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions 12.1 kg 11.0 kg 12.1 kg 11.0 kg 14.9 kg 13.1 kg 14.9 kg 13.1 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W, 110 W (32LH3800) AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W, 120 W (37LH3800) AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 180 W 42LH3*** 42LH3000-ZA 42LH3010-ZB/ 42LH3020-ZD 42LH3030-ZE/ 42LH3800-ZD 42LH3040-ZG 42LH301C-ZA 47LH3*** 47LH3000-ZA 47LH3010-ZB/ 47LH3020-ZD 47LH3030-ZE/ 47LH3040-ZG 47LH301C-ZA with stand 1028.0 mm x 715.4 mm x 297.0 mm 1028.0 mm x 716.4 mm x 270.6 mm 1140.6 mm x 784.8 mm x 337.4 mm 1140.6 mm x 788.3 mm x 318.9 mm without stand 1028.0 mm x 658.6 mm x 88.7 mm 1028.0 mm x 658.6 mm x 88.7 mm 1140.6 mm x 722.9 mm x 99.0 mm 1140.6 mm x 722.9 mm x 99.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Weight with stand without stand Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size Operating Temperature ■ 18.0 kg 16.2 kg 22.5 kg 19.9 kg 22.5 kg 19.9 kg AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W, 150 W (42LH3800) AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 280 W AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 280 W 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Environment condition 18.0 kg 16.2 kg Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX 161 APPENDIX 32LH70** 32LH7000-ZA/32LH7010-ZD 32LH7020-ZC/32LH7030-ZE 37LH70** 37LH7000-ZA/37LH7010-ZD 37LH7020-ZC/37LH7030-ZE 803 mm x 632.9 mm x 284.8 mm 903 mm x 689.1 mm x 299.5 mm without stand 803 mm x 584.2 mm x 75mm 903 mm x 639.4 mm x 51.8 mm with stand without stand 13.5 kg 11.6 kg 16.2 kg 14.1 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 180 W 42LH70** 47LH70** 42LH7000-ZA/42LH7010-ZD 42LH7020-ZC/42LH7030-ZE 47LH7000-ZA/47LH7010-ZD 47LH7020-ZC/47LH7030-ZE with stand 1009.7 mm x 753.6 mm x 334.4 mm 1123.5 mm x 823.4 mm x 372.8 mm without stand 1009.7 mm x 695.4 mm x 39.7 mm 1123.5 mm x 765.4 mm x 40.9 mm with stand without stand 19.8 kg 17.2 kg 26.4 kg 22.8 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 230 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 300 W MODELS with stand Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition Supported movie files ■ APPENDIX 162 Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. 32LH49** 37LH49** 32LH4900-ZD 37LH4900-ZD 804.4 mm x 589.1 mm x 210.9 mm 924.7 mm x 667.7 mm x 270.6mm without stand 804.4 mm x 529.2 mm x 81.0mm 924.7 mm x 599.9 mm x 89.6mm with stand without stand 12.7 kg 11.5 kg 15.8 kg 14.0 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 150 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 180 W 42LH49** 47LH49** 42LH4900-ZD 47LH4900-ZD MODELS with stand Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions 1036.0 mm x 722.3 mm x 270.6 mm 1153.2 mm x 793.3 mm x 319.0mm without stand 1036.0 mm x 655.4 mm x 89.8mm 1153.2 mm x 719.0 mm x 99.8mm with stand without stand 18.9 kg 17.1 kg 22.2 kg 19.6 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 260 W with stand (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Supported movie files ■ 0°C to 40°C Operating Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX 163 APPENDIX 32LF25** MODELS 37LF25** 32LF2500-ZA 32LF2510-ZB 37LF2500-ZA 37LF2510-ZB with stand 801.8 mm x 604.2 mm x 227.8 mm 801.8 mm x 604.2 mm x 227.3 mm 919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 289.0 mm 919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 293.8 mm without stand 801.8 mm x 544.1 mm x 79.0 mm 801.8 mm x 544.1 mm x 79.0 mm 919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm 919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm with stand without stand 13.4 kg 13.4 kg 18.8 kg 18.8 kg 11.9 kg 11.9 kg 16.2 kg 16.2 kg Power requirement AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz Power Consumption 150 W 150 W 180 W 180 W Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight 42LF25** MODELS Dimensions 42LF2500-ZA 42LF2510-ZB with stand 1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 289.0 mm 1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 293.8 mm without stand 1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm 1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm with stand without stand 23.6 kg 21.0 kg 23.6 kg 21.0 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 210 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 210 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition ■ APPENDIX 164 Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. MODELS 32LG2*** 37LG2*** 42LG2*** 32LG2100-ZA 32LG2200-ZA 37LG2100-ZA 42LG2100-ZA with stand 801.8 mm x 604.2 mm x 227.3 mm 919.6 mm x 682.3 mm x 293.8 mm 1032.8 mm x 742.3 mm x 293.8 mm without stand 801.8 mm x 544.1 mm x 79.0 mm 919.6 mm x 610.3 mm x 89.0 mm 1032.8 mm x 670.1 mm x 92.0 mm with stand without stand 13.4 kg 18.8 kg 11.9 kg 16.2 kg 23.6 kg 21.0 kg Power requirement AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz Power Consumption 150 W 180 W Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight 19LD3** 22LD3** 19LD320-ZA 22LD320-ZA with stand 462.4 mm x 353.0 mm x 171.0 mm 533.4 mm x 397.0 mm x 171.0 mm without stand 462.4 mm x 308.0 mm x 65.0 mm 533.4 mm x 351.7 mm x 65.0 mm with stand without stand 3.8 kg 3.6 kg 4.8 kg 4.6 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 30 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 50 W 26LD3** 32LD3** 26LD320-ZA 32LD320-ZA with stand 667.0 mm x 504.0 mm x 224.0 mm 805.0 mm x 583.0 mm x 224.0 mm without stand 667.0 mm x 446.2 mm x 80.0 mm 805.0 mm x 528.0 mm x 79.9 mm with stand without stand 8.9 kg 7.8 kg 11.5 kg 10.3 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 100 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 120 W MODELS Dimensions AC 100-240 V~50 / 60 Hz 210 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition ■ Operating Humidity 0°C to 40°C Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX CI Module Size 165 APPENDIX 50PS70** 60PS70** 50PS7000-ZA 60PS7000-ZA with stand 1228.8 mm x 835.8 mm x 309 mm 1465.4 mm x 986.4 mm x 371 mm without stand 1228.8 mm x 784.5 mm x 78.9 mm 1465.4 mm x 932.2 mm x 82.1 mm with stand without stand 38.1 kg 34.1 kg 53.3 kg 46.3 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 490 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 580 W 50PS80** 60PS80** 50PS8000-ZA 60PS8000-ZA MODELS Dimensions (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption MODELS Dimensions with stand 1228.8 mm x 835.8 mm x 309 mm 1465.4 mm x 986.4 mm x 371 mm without stand 1228.8 mm x 795.1 mm x 78.9 mm 1465.4 mm x 926.7 mm x 82.1 mm with stand without stand 38.3 kg 34.3 kg 53.6 kg 46.6 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 490 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 580 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition Supported movie files ■ APPENDIX 166 0°C to 40°C Operating Humidity Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. MODELS Dimensions 42PQ35** 50PQ35** 42PQ3500-ZB 50PQ3500-ZB 1031.2 mm x 720.9 mm x 308.0 mm 1216.7 mm x 818.1 mm x 353.0 mm without stand 1031.2 mm x 656.7 mm x 80.8mm 1216.7 mm x 759.0 mm x 83.0 mm with stand without stand 24.3 kg 22.2 kg 33.7 kg 31.2 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 320 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 430 W with stand (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition Supported movie files ■ 0°C to 40°C Operating Humidity Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. APPENDIX 167 APPENDIX MODELS Dimensions 42PQ65** 50PS65** 42PQ6500-ZA 50PS6500-ZA with stand 1040.8 mm x 725.8 mm x 308 mm 1228.8 mm x 824.6 mm x 353.0 mm without stand 1040.8 mm x 669.2 mm x 76.8 mm 1228.8 mm x 772.0 mm x 78.9 mm with stand without stand 25.3 kg 23.3 kg 36.3 kg 33.8 kg AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 320 W AC 100-240 V~ 50 / 60 Hz 490 W (Width x Height x Depth) Weight Power requirement Power Consumption CI Module Size 100.0 mm x 55.0 mm x 5.0 mm (Width x Height x Depth) Operating Temperature Environment condition 0°C to 40°C Operating Humidity Less than 80 % Storage Temperature -20°C to 60°C Storage Humidity Less than 85 % Refer to p.104 Supported movie files ■ The specifications shown above may be changed without prior notice for quality improvement. Television System Program Coverage Digital TV Analogue TV DVB-T PAL/SECAM B/G/D/K, PAL I/II, DVB-C (Sweden, Finland only) SECAM L/L’ VHF, UHF VHF: E2 to E12, UHF: E21 to E69, CATV: S1 to S20, HYPER: S21 to S47 External Antenna Impedance APPENDIX 168 75 Ω 75 Ω IR CODES *This feature is not available for all models. Code (Hexa) 95 08 0B 79 F0 45 43 AB 40 41 07 06 44 28 AA 30 02 03 1E 09 00 01 10~19 53 1A 72 71 63 61 20 21 39 7E 65 Function Energy Saving POWER INPUT RATIO TV/RAD Q.MENU MENU GUIDE Up ( ) Down ( ) Left ( ) Right ( ) OK( ) RETURN/EXIT INFO i AV MODE + FAV ( MARK ) MUTE P P Number Key 0~9 LIST Q.VIEW RED Key GREEN Key YELLOW Key BLUE Key TEXT T.OPT(T.Option) SUBTITLE SIMPLINK FREEZE Note R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON(POWER ON/OFF) R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON R/C BUTTON APPENDIX 169 APPENDIX EXTERNAL CONTROL DEVICE SETUP RS-232C Setup Connect the RS-232C (serial port) input jack to an external control device (such as a computer or an A/V control system) to control the product’s functions externally. Connect the serial port of the control device to the RS-232C jack on the product back panel. Note: RS-232C connection cables are not supplied with the product. Type of Connector; D-Sub 9-Pin Male No. Pin Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 No connection RXD (Receive data) TXD (Transmit data) DTR (DTE side ready) GND DSR (DCE side ready) RTS (Ready to send) CTS (Clear to send) 1 5 6 9 No Connection RS-232C Configurations 7-Wire Configurations (Standard RS-232C cable) APPENDIX 170 RXD TXD GND DTR DSR RTS CTS PC TV 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 3 2 5 6 4 8 7 D-Sub 9 D-Sub 9 TXD RXD GND DSR DTR CTS RTS 3-Wire Configurations(Not standard) RXD TXD GND DTR DSR RTS CTS PC TV 2 3 5 4 6 7 8 3 2 5 6 4 7 8 D-Sub 9 D-Sub 9 TXD RXD GND DTR DSR RTS CTS Set ID Use this function to specify a set ID number. Refer to ‘Real Data Mapping’. G p .175 OPTION Move OK OPTION E SIMPLINK : On Key Lock : Off Key Lock : Off ::11 Simple Manual Set ID ID Set ::11 Set ID ID Set OK E : On Simple Manual Power Indicator Power Indicator F Demo Mode : On Demo Mode : On Mode Setting : Store Demo Mode Setting : Store Demo 1 G Close Factory Reset Factory Reset 1 MENU Move SIMPLINK Select O P T I O N. 2 OK 3 OK Select S e t I D. Adjust Set ID to choose the desired TV ID number. The adjustment range of SET ID is 1 to 99. APPENDIX • Press R E T U R N to move to the previous menu screen. 171 APPENDIX Communication Parameters Baud rate : 9600 bps (UART) A Data length : 8 bits A Parity : None Stop bit : 1 bit A Communication code : ASCII code A Use a crossed (reverse) cable. A A Transmission / Receiving Protocol Transmission [Command1][Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Command Reference List COMMAND COMMAND DATA 1 2 (Hexadecimal) APPENDIX 172 01. Power 02. Aspect Ratio 03. Screen Mute 04. Volume Mute 05. Volume Control 06. Contrast 07. Brightness 08. Colour 09. Tint 10. Sharpness 11. OSD Select 12. Remote control lock mode 13. Treble 14. Bass 15. Balance 16. Colour Temperature 17. ISM Method 18. Energy Saving 19. Auto Configuration 20. Tune Command 21. Programme Add/Skip 22. Key 23. Control Back Light 24. Input select (Main) k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k k j j j m m m m x a c d e f g h i j k l m r s t u p q u a b c g b 00 to 01 Refer to p. 173 00 to 01 00 to 01 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 01 00 to 01 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 64 00 to 02 Refer to p. 175 00 to 04 01 Refer to p. 175 00 to 01 Key Code 00 to 64 Refer to p. 176 * When setting the 17 to 24, a menu does not appear on screen. * Note : During USB operations such as Dvix or EMF, all commands except Power(ka) and Key(mc) are not executed and treated as NG. * [Command 1] : First command to control the TV. (j, k, m or x) [Command 2] : Second command to control the TV. * : You can adjust the set ID to choose * [Set ID] desired monitor ID number in option menu. Adjustment range is 1 to 99. When selecting Set ID ‘0’, every connected set is controlled. Set ID is indicated as decimal (1 to 99) on menu and as Hexa decimal (0x0 to 0x63) on transmission/receiving protocol. : To transmit command data. * [DATA] Transmit ‘FF’ data to read status of command. [Cr] : Carriage Return * ASCII code ‘0x0D’ : ASCII code ‘space (0x20)’ * [ ] OK Acknowledgement [Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][OK][Data][x] * The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving normal data. At this time, if the data is data read mode, it indicates present status data. If the data is data write mode, it returns the data of the PC computer. Error Acknowledgement [Command2][ ][Set ID][ ][NG][Data][x] * The set transmits ACK (acknowledgement) based on this format when receiving abnormal data from non-viable functions or communication errors. Data 00: Illegal Code 01. Power (Command: k a) 0 4 . V o l u m e M u t e (C o m m a n d : k e ) G To control Power On/Off of the set. G To control volume mute on/off. Transmission [k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] You can also adjust mute using the MUTE button on remote control. Transmission Data 00 : Power Off Ack [k][e][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] 01 : Power On G To show Power On/Off. Data 00 : Volume mute on (Volume off) 01 : Volume mute off (Volume on) Ack Transmission [e][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] [k][a][ ][Set ID][ ][FF][Cr] 0 5 . V o l u m e C o n t r o l (C o m m a n d : k f ) Ack G To adjust volume. [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] * Similarly, if other functions transmit ‘0xFF’ data based on this format, Acknowledgement data feed back presents status about each function. * OK Ack., Error Ack. and other message may display on the screen when TV is power On. 0 2 . A s p e c t R a t i o (C o m m a n d : k c ) ( M a i n P i c t u r e S i z e ) G To adjust the screen format. (Main picture format) You can also adjust the screen format using the A s p e c t R a t i o in the Q.MENU. or PICTURE menu. Transmission [k][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data 01 : Normal screen (4:3) 02 : Wide screen (16:9) 04 : Zoom 06 : Original Ack 07 : 14:9 09 : Just Scan 0B : Full Wide 10 to 1F :Cinema Zom 1 to 16 You can also adjust volume with the VOLUME buttons on remote control. Transmission [k][f][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack [f][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 0 6 . C o n t r a s t (C o m m a n d : k g ) G To adjust screen contrast. You can also adjust contrast in the PICTURE menu. Transmission [k][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 0 7 . B r i g h t n e s s (C o m m a n d : k h ) G To adjust screen brightness. You can also adjust brightness in the PICTURE menu. Transmission * Using the PC input, you select either 16:9 or 4:3 screen aspect ratio. * In DTV/HDMI (1080i 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 720p 50 Hz / 60 Hz, 1080p 24 Hz / 30 Hz / 50 Hz / 60 Hz), Component(720p, 1080i, 1080p 50 Hz / 60 Hz) mode, Just Scan is available. * F u l l W i d e is supported only for Analogue, AV1, 2, 3. 0 3 . S c r e e n M u t e (C o m m a n d : k d ) Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack G To select screen mute on/off. [h][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] [k][h][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] 0 8 . C o l o u r (C o m m a n d : k i ) [k][d][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data 00 : Screen mute off (Picture on) Video mute off 01 : Screen mute on (Picture off) 10 : Video mute on G To adjust the screen colour. Ack [d][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] * In case of video mute on only, TV will display On Screen Display(OSD). But, in case of Screen mute on, TV will not display OSD. You can also adjust colour in the PICTURE menu. Transmission [k][i][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack APPENDIX Transmission [i][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 173 APPENDIX 0 9 . T i n t (C o m m a n d : k j ) G To adjust the screen tint. You can also adjust tint in the PICTURE menu. 13. Treble (Command: k r) G To adjust treble. Transmission You can also adjust treble in the AUDIO menu. Transmission [k][j][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] [k][r][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Red : 00 to Green : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. [j][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] Ack [r][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 1 4 . Bass (Command: k s) 1 0 . S h a r p n e s s (C o m m a n d : k k ) G To adjust the screen sharpness. You can also adjust sharpness in the PICTURE menu. Transmission [k][k][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack [k][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] G To adjust bass. You can also adjust bass in the AUDIO menu. Transmission [k][s][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack [s][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 1 5 . B a l a n c e (C o m m a n d : k t ) G To adjust balance. 1 1 . O S D S e l e c t (C o m m a n d : k l ) G To select OSD (On Screen Display) on/off when controlling remotely. You can also adjust balance in the AUDIO menu. Transmission Transmission Data Min : 00 to Max : 64 * Refer to ‘Real data mapping 1’. See page 175. Ack [k][l][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data 00 : OSD off Ack 01 : OSD on [k][t][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] [t][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] [l][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 1 6 . C o l o u r T e m p e r a t u r e (C o m m a n d : k u ) 1 2 . Remote control lock mode ( C o m m a n d : k m ) G To lock the front panel controls on the monitor and remote control. Transmission APPENDIX 174 Temperature in the PICTURE menu. Transmission [k][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] [k][m][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data 00 : Lock off Ack G To adjust colour temperature. You can also adjust Colour 01 : Lock on [m][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] * If you are not using the remote control, use this mode. When main power is on/off, external control lock is released. * Local Power Key will work properly. Data 00: Medium 01:Cool Ack 02: Warm [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 19. Auto Configure(Command: j u) 17. ISM Method (Plasma TV only) (Command: j p) G To adjust picture position and minimize image shaking G To control the ISM method. You can also adjust ISM Method in OPTION menu. Transmission automatically. It works only in RGB (PC) mode. Transmission [j][u][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] [j][p][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data 01: To set Ack Data 02: Orbiter 04: White wash 08: Normal 20: Colour Wash [u][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 20.Tune Command (Command: m a) Ack G Select channel to following physical number. [p][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] Transmission [m][a][ ][Set ID][ ][Data0][ ][Data1][ ][Data2][Cr] 18. Energy Saving (Command: j q) G To reduce the power consumption of the TV. You can also adjust Energy Saving in OPTION menu. Transmission [j][q][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Power Saving Function Level Description 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 0 0 Off 0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 0 1 Minimum 0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 1 0 Medium 0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 0 1 1 Maximum 0 0 0 0 Low Power 0 1 0 0 Auto Screen Off 0 1 0 1 (LCD TV/LED 0 0 0 0 Low Power LCD TV only) Intelligent Sensor Low(Plasma TV only) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 Intelligent Sensor 0 0 0 1 Middle(Plasma TV only) 0 0 0 1 Intelligent Sensor 0 0 1 0 High(Plasma TV only) Data00 : High channel data Data01 : Low channel data ex. No. 47 -> 00 2F (2FH) No. 394 -> 01 8A (18AH), DTV No. 0 -> Don’t care Data02 : 0x00 : Analogue Main 0x10 : DTV Main 0x20 : Radio Channel data range Analogue - Min: 00 to Max: 63 (0 to 99) Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 3E7 (0 to 999) (Except For Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland) Digital - Min: 00 to Max: 270F (0 to 9999) (Only Sweden, Finland, Norway, Denmark, Ireland) Ack [a][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] Data Min: 00 to Max: 7DH 21. Programme Add/Skip(Command: m b) G To set skip status for the current Programme. Transmission [m][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data 00 : Skip 01 : Add Ack [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] Ack [q][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] * Real data mapping 1 00 : Step 0 A : Step 10 (Set ID 10) F : Step 15 (Set ID 15) 10 : Step 16 (Set ID 16) 64 : Step 100 6E : Step 110 73 : Step 115 74 : Step 116 * Real data mapping 2 00 :-40 01 :-39 02 :-38 28 :0 4E : +38 4F : +39 50 : +40 APPENDIX (except for 19/22LU40**, 19/22/26LU50**, 32/37/42LF25**, 32/37/42LG2***, 32/37/42LG33**, 19/22/26LG31**, 19/22/26/32/37/42LH20**, 19/22/26/32LD3**, 32/37/42/47LH3***, 50/60PS70**, 50/60PS80**, 42/50PQ35**, 42PQ65**, 50PS65**) C7: Step 199 FE : Step 254 FF : Step 255 175 APPENDIX 22. Key(Command: m c) G To send IR remote key code. Transmission [m][c][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Key code - Refer to page 169. Ack [c][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] 2 4 . I n p u t s e l e c t (C o m m a n d : x b ) (Main Picture Input) G To select input source for main picture. Transmission [x][b][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data Structure MSB 0 LSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 External Input Input Number External Input Data 23. Control Back Light (Command: m g) ( L C D T V/ L E D L C D T V o n l y ) 0 0 0 0 DTV G To Control the back light. 0 0 0 1 Analogue 0 0 1 0 AV 0 1 0 0 Component 0 1 1 0 RGB 1 0 0 1 HDMI Transmission [m][g][ ][Set ID][ ][Data][Cr] Data : data Min: 00 to Max: 64 Ack [g][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] Input Number Data 0 0 0 0 Input1 0 0 0 1 Input2 0 0 1 0 Input3 0 0 1 1 Input4 Ack [b][ ][Set ID][ ][OK/NG][Data][x] APPENDIX 176 0 Open source software notice The following GPL executables and LGPL/MPL libraries used in this product are subject to the GPL2.0/LGPL2.1/MPL1.1 License Agreements: GPL EXECUTABLES: • Linux kernel 2.6 • busybox • lzo LGPL LIBRARIES: • uClibc MPL LIBRARIES: • Nanox LG Electronics offers to provide source code to you on CD-ROM for a charge covering the cost of performing such distribution, such as the cost of media, shipping and handling upon e-mail request to LG Electronics at: opensource@lge.com This offer is valid for a period of three(3) years from the date of the distribution of this product by LG Electronics. You can obtain a copy of the GPL, LGPL, MPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl2.0.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1.html, http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/MPL-1.1.html. Also you can obtain the translation of GPL, LGPL licenses from http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/gpl2.0-translations.html, http://www.gnu.org/licenses/old-licenses/lgpl-2.1-translations.html. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group copyright © 1991 – 1998, Thomas G. Lane. This product includes • libpng library : copyright © 2004 Glenn Randers-Pehrson • Zlib compression library: Copyright © 1995-2002 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler. • Tinyxml library : copyright (c) 2000-2006 Lee Thomason APPENDIX 177 APPENDIX OPEN SOURCE LICENSE GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION APPENDIX 178 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you". Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) APPENDIX The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. 179 APPENDIX If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not ccept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. 9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. APPENDIX 180 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.Copyright (C) This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c' for details. The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w' and `show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: , 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. APPENDIX Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision' (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. 181 APPENDIX GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author's reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-free programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. APPENDIX We call this license the "Lesser" General Public License because it does Less to protect the user's freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. 182 Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a "work based on the library" and a "work that uses the library". The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called "this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you". A "library" means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The "Library", below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A "work based on the Library" means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) "Source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library's complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. APPENDIX (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) 183 APPENDIX Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a "work that uses the Library" uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a "work that uses the Library" with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer's own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: APPENDIX 184 a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-readable "work that uses the Library", as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user's computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the "work that uses the Library" must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. 11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. APPENDIX It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. 185 APPENDIX 13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. Copyright (C) This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301 USA APPENDIX Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. , 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice 186 MOZILLA PUBLIC LICENSE Version 1.1 --------------1. Definitions. 1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party. 1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications. 1.2. "Contributor Version" means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor. 1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof. 1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data. 1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code. 1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A. 1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. 1.8. "License" means this document. 1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. 1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is: A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications. B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications. 1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License. 1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor. 1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge. 1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. For legal entities, "You" includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control" means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity. 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and APPENDIX 2. Source Code License. 187 APPENDIX (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof). (c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices. 2.2. Contributor Grant. Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination). (c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor. 3. Distribution Obligations. 3.1. Application of License. The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5. 3.2. Availability of Source Code. Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. 3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code. APPENDIX 188 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL" which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained. (b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file. (c) Representations. Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License. 3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License. If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer. 3.7. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. 4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation. If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it. 5. Application of this License. This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code. 6. Versions of the License. 6.2. Effect of New Versions. Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License. APPENDIX 6.1. New Versions. Netscape Communications Corporation ("Netscape") may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. 189 APPENDIX 6.3. Derivative Works. If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL", "Netscape", "MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.) 7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. 8. TERMINATION. 8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive. 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that: (a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above. (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that Participant. 8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license. 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination. 9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. APPENDIX 190 UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein. 11. MISCELLANEOUS. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License. 12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS. As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability. 13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE. Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as "Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed" means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the NPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A. EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License. ``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. The Original Code is ______________________________________. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________. Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______ _______________________. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s): ______________________________________. [NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.] APPENDIX Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [___] License." 191
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 8.1.0 (Windows) Creator Tool : QuarkXPress™: LaserWriter 8 8.7.3 Modify Date : 2010:02:18 13:20:42+09:00 Create Date : 2009:05:28 16:35:25+09:00 Metadata Date : 2010:02:18 13:20:42+09:00 Document ID : uuid:935eedcf-3a40-45bd-89ff-7d1cfb2002a9 Instance ID : uuid:c557d7a8-bd52-49b3-a697-6a38bb3822be Format : application/pdf Title : SAC31539709_eng_REV08 Creator : CMJ Has XFA : No Page Count : 194 Author : CMJEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools